ABB SLC 2 Instruction Manual

Add to my manuals
178 Pages

advertisement

ABB SLC 2 Instruction Manual | Manualzz
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Command Series®
Strategic Loop Controller
Type SLC_2
PN25055
Trademarks and Registrations
LAN-90, PCV, Command Series, INFI 90 and Network 90 are registered trademarks of ABB Inc.
Mylar is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont de Nemours Company, Incorporated.
WARNING notices as used in this manual apply to hazards or unsafe practices which could result in personal
injury or death.
CAUTION notices apply to hazards or unsafe practices which could result in property damage.
NOTES highlight procedures and contain information which assist the operator in understanding the information contained in this manual.
All software, including design, appearance, algorithms and source codes, is copyrighted by ABB Inc. and is
owned by ABB Inc. or its suppliers.
WARNING
POSSIBLE PROCESS UPSETS. Maintenance must be performed only by qualified personnel and only after
securing equipment controlled by this product. Adjusting or removing this product while it is in the system may
upset the process being controlled. Some process upsets may cause injury or damage.
NOTICE
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
ABB Inc., its affiliates, employees, and agents, and the authors of and contributors to this publication specifically disclaim all liabilities and warranties, express and implied (including warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose), for the accuracy, currency, completeness, and/or reliability of the information
contained herein and/or for the fitness for any particular use and/or for the performance of any material and/or
equipment selected in whole or part with the user of/or in reliance upon information contained herein. Selection
of materials and/or equipment is at the sole risk of the user of this publication.
This document contains proprietary information of ABB Inc., and is issued in strict confidence. Its use, or reproduction for use, for the reverse engineering, development or manufacture of hardware or software described
herein is prohibited. No part of this document may be photocopied or reproduced without the prior written consent of ABB Inc..
Copyright 2002 ABB Inc. [August, 2002]
Table of Contents
Page
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................1-1
INSTRUCTION OVERVIEW ...........................................................................................................1-1
INTENDED USER ...........................................................................................................................1-2
PRODUCT OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................................1-2
Functional Description..............................................................................................................1-2
Physical....................................................................................................................................1-4
Communication System ...........................................................................................................1-5
GLOSSARY OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS...........................................................................1-8
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS ..........................................................................................................1-8
NOMENCLATURE ..........................................................................................................................1-9
SPECIFICATIONS ..........................................................................................................................1-9
SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................2-1
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................2-1
UNPACKING AND INSPECTION ...................................................................................................2-1
SPECIAL HANDLING PROCEDURES ...........................................................................................2-1
INSTALLATION LOCATION ...........................................................................................................2-3
Hazardous Locations ...............................................................................................................2-3
Radio Frequency Interference..................................................................................................2-3
MOUNTING .....................................................................................................................................2-4
WIRING REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................................2-4
Power Wiring ............................................................................................................................2-6
DC POWER WIRING ........................................................................................................2-6
AC POWER WIRING ........................................................................................................2-8
REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY WIRING .......................................................................2-9
Grounding Procedures .............................................................................................................2-9
AC SAFETY GROUND .....................................................................................................2-9
DC SYSTEM COMMON GROUND ................................................................................2-10
SINGLE POINT GROUNDING .......................................................................................2-10
Input/Output Wiring ................................................................................................................2-12
ANALOG I/O WIRING .....................................................................................................2-12
DIGITAL I/O WIRING ......................................................................................................2-14
Peer-to-Peer Communication Wiring .....................................................................................2-17
PRE-OPERATING ADJUSTMENTS .............................................................................................2-18
Termination Board Switch Settings ........................................................................................2-19
ANALOG INPUTS...........................................................................................................2-19
ANALOG OUTPUTS .......................................................................................................2-20
DIGITAL INPUTS............................................................................................................2-21
Main Board Jumper Settings ..................................................................................................2-21
Optional Input Board Jumper Settings ...................................................................................2-22
Serial Interface .......................................................................................................................2-22
SERIAL INTERFACE ADAPTER ....................................................................................2-23
SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD JUMPER SETTINGS .....................................................2-24
SECTION 3 - SETUP ...................................................................................................................3-1
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................3-1
SCREEN CONVENTIONS AND PUSHBUTTON FUNCTIONS......................................................3-1
Single Function Pushbuttons ...................................................................................................3-1
Multi-Function Soft Keys ..........................................................................................................3-1
SETUP MENU OPTIONS SUMMARY ............................................................................................3-2
ENTER SETUP ...............................................................................................................................3-3
PROCESS LOOP SETUP ...............................................................................................................3-4
i
Table of Contents (continued)
Page
LOOP OPTIONS .............................................................................................................................3-5
MODULE BUS ADDRESS...............................................................................................................3-8
DIGITAL OUTPUTS LOCKOUT ......................................................................................................3-9
SECURITY LEVELS ......................................................................................................................3-10
DIAGNOSTICS ..............................................................................................................................3-12
OPTIONS ......................................................................................................................................3-12
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS ...............................................................................................................3-20
ANALOG/DIGITAL OUTPUTS.......................................................................................................3-21
Analog Output Default Settings ..............................................................................................3-21
Digital Output Control .............................................................................................................3-22
Operator Alarms .....................................................................................................................3-22
SECTION 4 - CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................4-1
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................4-1
SCREEN CONVENTIONS AND PUSHBUTTON FUNCTIONS ......................................................4-1
Single Function Pushbuttons....................................................................................................4-2
Multi-Function Soft Keys ..........................................................................................................4-2
CONFIGURATION MENU OPTIONS SUMMARY ..........................................................................4-3
FACTORY CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................4-3
Entering a Factory Configuration..............................................................................................4-3
Control Loop Selection .............................................................................................................4-5
Analog Input Values .................................................................................................................4-6
PID Constants ..........................................................................................................................4-7
Output Bar Graph High/Low Labels .........................................................................................4-8
Process Variable and Set Point Values....................................................................................4-9
PV Alarm Values ....................................................................................................................4-10
Manual Control Upon Bad Quality of the Analog Inputs/Outputs ...........................................4-10
Save or Abort Configuration ...................................................................................................4-11
CUSTOM CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................4-12
Block Address ........................................................................................................................4-13
Function Codes ......................................................................................................................4-14
Specification List ....................................................................................................................4-16
Function Blocks ......................................................................................................................4-16
FIXED BLOCKS ..............................................................................................................4-16
USER-DEFINED BLOCKS..............................................................................................4-16
CONFIGURATION UTILIZATION FACTORS ...............................................................................4-17
CONFIGURATION DATA REQUIRED ..........................................................................................4-17
Station Functions....................................................................................................................4-17
BASIC STATION .............................................................................................................4-18
CASCADE STATION ......................................................................................................4-18
RATIO STATION.............................................................................................................4-18
Dual Loop Operation ..............................................................................................................4-18
Cascade Operation ................................................................................................................4-19
Configuration Lock .................................................................................................................4-20
Tune/Modify Lock ...................................................................................................................4-21
EXECUTION CYCLE TIME S1, S2 FUNCTION CODE 82 BLOCK 15...........................4-21
START-UP TIME S4 FUNCTION CODE 90 BLOCK 20 .................................................4-21
D.O. LOCK ....................................................................................................................................4-22
Trip Blocks/Test Quality Blocks ..............................................................................................4-22
GOOD/BAD SIGNAL QUALITY STATUS .......................................................................4-22
ANALOG OUTPUT QUALITY .........................................................................................4-23
Reverse Acting Final Control Elements..................................................................................4-26
Entering Data .........................................................................................................................4-26
ii
Table of Contents (continued)
Page
MODIFYING A FACTORY CONFIGURATION .............................................................................4-27
CUSTOM CONFIGURATION AIDS ..............................................................................................4-28
SECTION 5 - OPERATING PROCEDURES................................................................................5-1
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................5-1
SINGLE FUNCTION PUSHBUTTONS............................................................................................5-1
MULTI-FUNCTION SOFT KEYS.....................................................................................................5-1
NORMAL OPERATION ...................................................................................................................5-2
POWER UP.....................................................................................................................................5-2
PROCESS DISPLAY.......................................................................................................................5-3
Full Screen or Split Screen ......................................................................................................5-5
Change Loop............................................................................................................................5-5
Set Point, Control Output and Changing Modes ......................................................................5-5
BASIC STATION...............................................................................................................5-5
CASCADE STATION ........................................................................................................5-7
RATIO STATION ..............................................................................................................5-8
MAIN MENU ..................................................................................................................................5-10
MONITOR .....................................................................................................................................5-11
ALARM SUMMARY.......................................................................................................................5-13
ACKNOWLEDGING ALARM FROM THE MAIN MENU ...............................................................5-14
BYPASS ........................................................................................................................................5-14
TUNE.............................................................................................................................................5-15
PID Constants ........................................................................................................................5-15
Process Variable (PV) Alarms................................................................................................5-17
D.O. CONTROL ............................................................................................................................5-18
AUXILIARY SWITCH OUTPUTS ..................................................................................................5-19
CONTROLLER RESET .................................................................................................................5-20
MODES OF OPERATION WHEN USING TYPE CTT TERMINAL ...............................................5-21
Execute ..................................................................................................................................5-21
Configure................................................................................................................................5-21
Error .......................................................................................................................................5-22
SECTION 6 - TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS ........................................................6-1
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................6-1
CHECKING PROCESS CONTROL INTEGRITY ............................................................................6-1
DIAGNOSTICS................................................................................................................................6-3
ERROR MESSAGES ......................................................................................................................6-5
BROKEN ANALOG OUTPUT CURRENT LOOP ............................................................................6-5
REFERENCE OR OVERRANGE ERROR ......................................................................................6-6
SECTION 7 - PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .............................................................................7-1
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................7-1
USING THE LOOP BYPASS STATION ..........................................................................................7-1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ..................................................................................7-2
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ............................................................................7-2
Cleaning the Faceplate ............................................................................................................7-2
Calibrating the Temperature Inputs..........................................................................................7-3
Cleaning Printed Circuit Boards ...............................................................................................7-3
Cleaning Edge Connectors ......................................................................................................7-4
iii
Table of Contents (continued)
Page
SECTION 8 - REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ..................................................8-1
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................8-1
USING THE LOOP BYPASS STATION ..........................................................................................8-1
REPLACING THE FACEPLATE/OPERATOR INTERFACE ASSEMBLY.......................................8-2
REPLACING THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD ................................................................................8-3
REPLACING FUSES .......................................................................................................................8-4
REPLACING THE MAIN, OPTION AND SERIAL INTERFACE BOARDS ......................................8-5
REPLACING THE TERMINATION BOARD ....................................................................................8-6
PARTS LIST ....................................................................................................................................8-7
REPLACEMENT PARTS AVAILABLE .........................................................................................8-9
APPENDIX A - CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS ........................................................................ A-1
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ A-1
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS..................................................................................................... A-1
Single Loop PID with Internal Set Point .................................................................................. A-1
Single Loop PID with External Set Point ................................................................................. A-2
Dual Loop Controller with Internal Set Point............................................................................ A-4
Dual Loop Controller with External Set Point .......................................................................... A-6
Cascade Control...................................................................................................................... A-8
Ratio Controller ..................................................................................................................... A-10
Fixed Block Locations ........................................................................................................... A-12
APPENDIX B - TYPE SLC SETUP WORKSHEETS .................................................................. B-1
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ B-1
APPENDIX C - TYPE SLC CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS................................................ C-1
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ C-1
APPENDIX D - QUICK REFERENCE......................................................................................... D-1
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ D-1
APPENDIX E - SCREEN FLOWCHART .................................................................................... E-1
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ E-1
APPENDIX F - RETROFIT INSTRUCTIONS FOR TYPE CLC CONTROLLER .........................F-1
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ F-1
Retrofit Instructions ................................................................................................................. F-1
Assembling the Retrofit Unit .................................................................................................... F-2
iv
List of Figures
No.
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-11.
2-12.
2-13.
2-14.
2-15.
2-16.
2-17.
2-18.
2-19.
2-20.
2-21.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
6-1.
6-2.
8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
8-4.
A-1.
A-2.
A-3.
A-4.
Title
Page
Faceplate with Main Menu Display ..........................................................................................1-4
Strategic Loop Controller Components ....................................................................................1-5
Faceplate Assembly .................................................................................................................1-6
Module Bus Network with Type CIC01 Computer Interface Command Module.......................1-6
Module Bus Network with Serial Interface ...............................................................................1-7
Module Bus Network with Plant Loop ......................................................................................1-7
Instrument Accuracy and Available Measuring Ranges
for Direct Temperature Inputs (Fahrenheit Scale) ..................................................................1-13
Instrument Accuracy and Available Measuring Ranges
for Direct Temperature Inputs (Celsius Scale)........................................................................1-14
External and Mounting Dimensions .........................................................................................2-5
DC and AC Power Supply Wiring Connections........................................................................2-7
Power Supply Board ................................................................................................................2-7
Recommended Single Point Grounding System .................................................................... 2-11
External Wiring Label .............................................................................................................2-13
Powered Four to 20 Milliamp Analog Input ............................................................................2-13
Unpowered or Field Powered Four to 20 Milliamp Analog Input ............................................2-14
Single Ended Voltage Input ....................................................................................................2-14
Differential Voltage Analog Input ............................................................................................2-15
Thermocouple, Millivolt and RTD Inputs ................................................................................2-15
Analog Output in Current Mode .............................................................................................2-16
Analog Output in Voltage Mode..............................................................................................2-16
Digital Inputs in Nonisolated Mode.........................................................................................2-17
Digital Inputs in Isolated Mode ...............................................................................................2-17
Digital Output Circuitry ...........................................................................................................2-18
Peer-to-Peer Communications Wiring Connections...............................................................2-19
Termination Board Switch Locations ......................................................................................2-20
Main Board Jumper Settings ..................................................................................................2-22
Optional Input Board Jumper Settings ...................................................................................2-23
Jumper Settings Schematic ...................................................................................................2-25
Serial Interface Board Jumper Settings .................................................................................2-26
Setup Menu..............................................................................................................................3-2
Process Display Selections......................................................................................................3-8
AI3 and AI4 Calibration Connections .....................................................................................3-14
Configuration Menu..................................................................................................................4-2
Test Quality/Trip Block Configuration .....................................................................................4-24
Analog Output Quality ............................................................................................................4-25
Reverse Acting Controllers ....................................................................................................4-27
Operator Interface Controls......................................................................................................5-2
Process Display Screen ...........................................................................................................5-4
Changing Controller Modes .....................................................................................................5-8
Trend Screen Description.......................................................................................................5-18
Entering the Execute Mode....................................................................................................5-22
Troubleshooting Flowchart .......................................................................................................6-2
Checking Common Mode Voltage............................................................................................6-6
Location of ROMs on Operator Interface Board.......................................................................8-3
Removing the Main Board........................................................................................................8-4
Replacing Power Supply Board Fuses.....................................................................................8-4
Parts Drawing...........................................................................................................................8-8
Single Loop Control, Internal Set Point ................................................................................... A-1
Single Loop Control, Internal Set Point, with Temperature Input ............................................ A-2
Single Loop Control, External Set Point .................................................................................. A-3
Single Loop Control, External Set Point, with Two Temperature Inputs .................................. A-4
v
List of Figures (continued)
No.
A-5.
A-6.
A-7.
A-8.
A-9.
A-10.
A-11.
A-12.
A-13.
A-14.
A-15.
D-1.
D-2.
D-3.
D-4.
D-5.
D-6.
E-1.
Title
Page
Dual Loop Control, Internal Set Point ...................................................................................... A-5
Dual Loop Control, Internal Set Points, Two Temperature Inputs............................................ A-6
Dual Loop Control, External Set Points (with or without Temperature Inputs)......................... A-7
Cascade Control...................................................................................................................... A-8
Cascade Control with Two Temperature Inputs....................................................................... A-9
Ratio Control ......................................................................................................................... A-10
Ratio Control with Two Temperature Inputs........................................................................... A-11
Fixed Block Locations of Function Codes After Initialization ................................................. A-12
Fixed Block Locations for Function Codes 113, 230 and 231 ............................................... A-13
Fixed Block Locations for Function Codes 81, 82, 89 and 90 ............................................... A-14
User Configuration Space...................................................................................................... A-15
Main Board .............................................................................................................................. D-1
Operator Interface Board......................................................................................................... D-1
Power Supply Board................................................................................................................ D-2
Termination Board ................................................................................................................... D-2
Options Board ......................................................................................................................... D-3
Serial Interface Board.............................................................................................................. D-3
Screen Flowchart .................................................................................................................... E-2
List of Tables
No.
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
6-1.
7-1.
8-1.
8-2.
vi
Title
Page
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations .....................................................................................1-8
Reference Documents .............................................................................................................1-8
Nomenclature ...........................................................................................................................1-9
Specifications ..........................................................................................................................1-9
Termination Board Summary of Options Settings .................................................................2-21
Serial Port Pin-Outs................................................................................................................2-23
Serial Interface Board J5 Settings ..........................................................................................2-24
Analog Input Functions for Predefined Configurations .............................................................4-6
Control Functions ..................................................................................................................4-14
Fixed and User-Defined Block Address Summary ................................................................4-17
Digital Output State ................................................................................................................4-22
Process Display Screen Descriptions ......................................................................................5-3
Basic Station - Adjusting SP and CO from the Faceplate ........................................................5-6
Cascade Station - Adjusting SP and CO from the Faceplate ...................................................5-7
Ratio Station - Adjusting SP and CO from the Faceplate.........................................................5-9
Acknowledging Alarms ..........................................................................................................5-14
Modes of Operation Comparison............................................................................................5-21
Diagnostic Tests ......................................................................................................................6-4
Preventive Maintenance Schedule ...........................................................................................7-2
Parts List .................................................................................................................................8-7
Recommended Spare Parts ....................................................................................................8-9
WBPEEUI130200B0
Read First
WARNING
INSTRUCTION MANUALS
Do not install, maintain or operate this equipment without reading,
understanding and following the proper factory-supplied instructions and
manuals, otherwise injury or damage may result.
RETURN OF EQUIPMENT
All equipment being returned to the factory for repair must be free of any
hazardous materials (acids, alkalis, solvents, etc.). A Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) for all process liquids must accompany returned equipment.
Contact the factory for authorization prior to returning equipment.
Read these instructions before starting installation;
save these instructions for future reference.
Contacting the Factory . . .
Should assistance be required with any of the company’s products, contact the following:
Telephone:
24-Hour Call Center
1-800-HELP-365
E-Mail:
[email protected]
Read First
I
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION
INSTRUCTION OVERVIEW
The Type SLC Strategic Loop Controller instruction contains eight
sections and six appendices.
Introduction
Contains an overview of the instruction and Type SLC controller, and
a description of the intended user. This section also provides a functional and physical description of the controller and a description of
the communication system (how the controller fits into a larger DCS
system). It also describes product nomenclature, reference documents and controller specifications.
Installation
Contains unpacking and inspection instructions and special handling
procedures for boards with semiconductor devices. This section also
provides mounting instructions, including special considerations for
mounting in hazardous locations. It also contains wiring instructions
for AC/DC power wiring, analog and digital I/O wiring and grounding
procedures.
Setup
Describes the main menu and setup screens and discusses the various options available. It includes procedures to enter the data and
provides examples of screen displays.
Configuration
Contains required user actions to establish and define the controller
configuration. This section also describes factory configurations in
which all data can be entered through the faceplate of the controller
via menu selections. It also provides custom and modified factory
configurations that require use of the Type CTT Configuration and
Tuning Terminal or other software configuration tools for entering
data.
Operating Procedures
Provides descriptions of the start-up, process, main menu, and the
first level of screens under the main menu. It also describes routine
operator functions that need to be addressed during daily operation of
the controller.
Troubleshooting and
Diagnostics
Describes the diagnostic tools available to aid in service. A troubleshooting guide and flowchart help determine and isolate problems
encountered during operation of the controller.
Preventive Maintenance
Provides a preventive maintenance program that will help the controller operate at an optimum level.
Repair and Replacement
Procedures
Describes procedures required to disassemble and assemble the
controller to enable parts replacement. It also includes a parts drawing and a recommended spare parts list.
INSTRUCTION OVERVIEW
1-1
INTRODUCTION
Appendices
Contain factory configuration drawings, setup and configuration
worksheets, a quick reference of controller switch settings, screen
flowchart and retrofit instructions for a Type CLC controller.
INTENDED USER
It is important for safety and operating reasons that the personnel
responsible for the installation, setup, configuration, operation, maintenance, troubleshooting and repair of this unit read and understand
the appropriate sections of this instruction. Do not install or complete
any tasks or procedures related to operation until doing so.
Installation Personnel
Should be an electrician or a person familiar with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and local wiring regulations.
Application Technician
Should have a solid background in electronics instrumentation and
process control and be familiar with proper grounding and safety procedures for electronic instrumentation.
Operator
Should have knowledge of the process and should read and understand this instruction before attempting any procedure pertaining to
the operation of the controller.
Maintenance Personnel
Should have a background in electricity and be able to recognize
shock hazards. Personnel must also be familiar with electronic process control instrumentation and have a good understanding of troubleshooting procedures.
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
This section contains functional, physical and communication characteristics of the controller.
Functional Description
The Type SLC Strategic Loop Controller is intended for small process
control applications and easily accommodates simple PID functions
to very complex multiloop control strategies. It can be used as a
stand-alone product, in conjunction with other Command Series® controllers, or as a component that can interface with ABB’s powerful
INFI 90® Open strategic process management system or the
Network 90® distributed control system.
On-board, factory configuration can be set up and tuned from the
faceplate.
Custom control strategies can be implemented using an external configuration device such as the handheld Type CTT Configuration and
Tuning Terminal, the PC-based ABB engineering work station, a PC
equipped with the CCAD01 Command CAD Configuration Tools
(Release 2.0) or WCAD01 Module Configuration Tools (Release 2.0).
These devices access a library of control algorithms contained in controller memory called function codes. The function codes are
INTENDED USER
1-2
INTRODUCTION
assigned to a block address in the user-definable space of controller
memory. Assigning a function code to a block address forms a function block. Control configurations are built by forming function blocks
and linking them together.
Menu-driven screens provide quick setup and unparalleled process
interface. Refer to Figure 1-1 and the following descriptions of the
main menu items.
FULL/SPLIT SCRN
Full screen process display shows the process variable (PV), set
point (SP) and control output (CO) of one loop (either loop can be displayed). The operator can interface to the displayed loop.
Split screen process display shows the PV, SP and CO of both loops
simultaneously. The operator can interface to both loops.
MONITOR
ALARM SUM
BYPASS
TUNE
D.O. CTRL
AUX. SWITCH
SETUP
Numerically displays all I/O and four function block outputs. It also
includes a STATUS menu item that includes diagnostics and software
revision levels.
Provides clear, concise alarm descriptions.
Locks in a manual override capability on both analog outputs.
Provides quick access to the PID tuning parameters and to adjustable
alarm settings.
Provides faceplate control of the four digital outputs.
Provides four auxiliary faceplate switches which can be used for troubleshooting or in the control strategy.
Allows determining:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CONFIGURE
Process display screen options.
Module bus address (0 to 31).
Password security options.
Diagnostics to verify hardware.
Special optional temperature/frequency input board setup.
Selection of trend screen options.
Display brightness.
Baud rate and data framing for serial interface.
Provides the menu-driven screens necessary to implement a factory
configuration.
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
1-3
INTRODUCTION
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
MAIN MENU
FULL/SPLIT SCRN
MONITOR
ALARM SUM
BYPASS
TUNE
D.O. CTRL
AUX. SWITCH
SETUP
CONFIGURE
S
E
L
A
/
M
TP80431B
Figure 1-1. Faceplate with
Main Menu Display
Physical
The controller is a panel-mounted, slide-out assembly that conforms
to DIN standards. The assembly contains four printed circuit boards
(main board, operator interface board, power supply board and termination board) and a faceplate assembly (Fig. 1-2). The operator interface board is attached to the faceplate assembly and is connected to
the main board via a 26-pin ribbon cable connector. Both the power
supply board and the main board plug into card edge connectors on
the termination board. The termination board is assembled to the rear
of the housing and provides plug-in terminal blocks for easy access
when making wiring connections in the field. The terminal blocks are
keyed and marked to prevent possible customer connection errors.
Type SLC22_ controllers have an optional input board for low level or
frequency/pulse inputs. It connects to P6 on the main board. Type
SLC_21 controllers have a serial interface board that allows termination board access to the serial interface at the rear of the controller.
The serial interface board connects to P7 and P8 on the main board.
The housing is welded sheet steel and contains card guides that are
riveted to the housing for installing the circuit boards. Multiple knockouts at the rear of the housing provide two ½-inch and one ¾-inch
conduit entrance facilities for electrical interconnections. The housing
also contains multiple holes in the top and bottom primarily for heat
dissipation.
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
1-4
INTRODUCTION
FACEPLATE
ASSY
CONTROLLER HOUSING
POWER SUPPLY BOARD
REAR
COVER
OPERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD
MAIN BOARD
26-PIN RIBBON CABLE
CONNECTOR (OPERATOR
INTERFACE BOARD TO
MAIN BOARD)
TERMINATION
BOARD
TP80417A
Figure 1-2. Strategic Loop Controller Components
Two captive mounting brackets, one for the top and one for the bottom, are supplied with each controller. When in position, the mounting
bracket secures the controller to the panel.
A captive locking screw (Fig. 1-3) located behind the door on the
faceplate must be loosened to remove the faceplate and operator
interface board assembly from the housing. Also located behind the
access door is the connector for the Type CTT Configuration and
Tuning Terminal or the serial interface adapter, and a controller reset
button.
Communication System
The Type SLC Strategic Loop Controller has peer-to-peer communications capability via the ABB module bus network. The module bus
can transfer approximately 600 to 700 real points (a mix of analog
and digital) per second. The network can contain up to 32 addressable modules/controllers, enabling over 60 loops of control.
Controllers on the network can be linked to a PC through the
stand-alone Type CIC01 Computer Interface Command Module (Fig.
1-4). Tools such as the ABB engineering work station software and
LAN-90® Process Control View (PCV®) can be used.
The serial interface allows connection to a PC without the use of the
Type CIC01 module (Fig. 1-5). This allows the use of a PC equipped
with Bailey-Fischer & Porter CCAD01 Command CAD Configuration
Tools (Release 2.0) or Elsag Bailey WCAD01 Module Configuration
Tools (Release 2.0).
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
1-5
INTRODUCTION
64 x 128 PIXEL
VACUUM
FLUORESCENT
DISPLAY
UNMARKED
MULTI-FUNCTION
SOFT KEYS
SELECT
PUSHBUTTON
UP/DOWN
PUSHBUTTONS
AUTO/MANUAL
PUSHBUTTON
ACCESS DOOR TO RESET, CTT OR
SERIAL INTERFACE CONNECTION,
AND LOCKING SCREW
T02156A
Figure 1-3. Faceplate Assembly
PC
CLC
CIC
CBE
CLC
CSC
CBC
CBE
UP TO 30
CONTROLLERS
MODULE BUS
MODULE BUS
EXPANSION BUS
610 M (2,000 FT) MAX.
SLC
LEGEND:
CBC = BATCH COMMAND CONTROLLER
CBE = MODULE BUS EXTENDER
CIC = COMPUTER INTERFACE COMMAND
CLC = LOOP COMMAND CONTROLLER
CSC = SEQUENCE COMMAND CONTROLLER
CTT = CONFIGURATION AND TUNING TERMINAL
PC = PERSONAL COMPUTER
SLC = STRATEGIC LOOP CONTROLLER
SLC
SLC
CTT
Figure 1-4. Module Bus Network with Type CIC01 Computer Interface Command Module
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
1-6
TP80408A
INTRODUCTION
FR O N T AC C ES S
S ER IA L IN TE R FAC E
C O N N EC T IO N
PC
S ER IA L C O N N EC T IO N FR O M
R E AR O F C O N TR O L L ER TO
P C D O E S N OT R E Q U IR E S IA.
SLC
CLC
CLC
CSC
CBC
S IA
CBE
CBE
M O D U L E BU S
U P TO 3 0
C O N TRO L L ER S
M O D U L E BU S
E XPA N SIO N BU S
6 1 0 M (2 ,0 00 F T) M A X
SLC
SLC
LEGEND:
C B C = B ATC H C O M M A N D C O N TRO L L ER
C B E = M O D U L E BU S E XT EN D E R
C L C = LO O P C O M M A N D C O N TRO L L ER
C S C = S E Q U E N C E C O M M AN D C O N TR O L L E R
SLC
C TT
C TT = C O N FIG U R ATIO N A N D T U N IN G TE R M IN A L
P C = P E R SO N A L C O M PU TER
S IA = S ER IA L IN TE R FAC E ADA P TE R
S L C = S TR ATE G IC L O O P C O N T RO LL E R
T 02 1 41 A
Figure 1-5. Module Bus Network with Serial Interface
By adding ABB communication modules, the network can be
accessed by a plant communications loop for interface to ABB’s powerful INFI 90 Open strategic process management system or the Network 90 distributed control system (Fig. 1-6).
NOTE: The Type CIC01 module cannot be used on a module bus
which is connected to the Plant Loop.
LIM
BIM
SLC
CLC
CLC
CBC
CSC
PLANT
LOOP
CBE
CBE
MODULE BUS
UP TO 30
CONTROLLERS
MODULE BUS
PC
EXPANSION BUS
IMCPM01
IMSPM01
610 M (2,000 FT) MAX.
LEGEND:
BIM = BUS INTERFACE MODULE
CBC = BATCH COMMAND CONTROLLER
CBE = MODULE BUS EXTENDER
CLC = LOOP COMMAND CONTROLLER
CSC = SEQUENCE COMMAND CONTROLLER
CTT = CONFIGURATION AND TUNING TERMINAL
IMCPM01 = CONFIGURATION PORT MODULE
IMSPM01 = SERIAL PORT MODULE
LIM = LOOP INTERFACE MODULE
PC = PERSONAL COMPUTER
SLC = STRATEGIC LOOP CONTROLLER
SLC
SLC
CTT
TP80430A
Figure 1-6. Module Bus Network with Plant Loop
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
1-7
INTRODUCTION
GLOSSARY OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Table 1-1 contains those terms and abbreviations that are unique to
ABB or have a definition that is different from standard industry
usage.
Table 1-1. Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
Term
Description
Cascade Station
An analog control station configuration that allows an externally generated signal, such
as the output of an upstream controller, to control the set point. One of three station
types available in the normal operating mode.
Fatal Error
An error that causes the device to go into a fail mode and send its output to a defined
value.
Function Block
The occurrence of a function code at a block address of a module.
Function Code
An algorithm which manipulates specific functions. These functions are linked together
to form the control strategy.
Loop
That portion of an analog process control loop which resides within the controller and
typically consists of an analog input measuring the process variable, a manual/auto
station generating a set point, a PID control algorithm and an analog output driving a
final control element.
Module Bus
Peer-to-peer communication link used to transfer information between intelligent
modules within a process control unit.
Ratio Station
An analog control station configuration that maintains a ratio between two variables. The
ratio of an externally generated wild variable times the controlled variable becomes the
set point that provides regulation of a third variable. One of three station types available
in the normal operating mode.
Termination Unit
Provides input/output connection between plant equipment and INFI 90 Open/
Network 90 modules.
Wild Variable
A variable that is used as a reference for a control loop.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Table 1-2. Reference Documents
Document No.
Title
I-E92-500-5
CLB01 Loop Bypass Station
I-E92-500-7
Type CLC Loop Command Controller
I-E92-501-2
CTT Configuration and Tuning Terminal
I-E92-504-1
CBE01 Module Bus Extender
I-E92-504-2
CIC01 Computer Interface Command
I-E96-200
Function Code Application Manual
I-E96-200-1
Function Code Quick Reference Guide
I-E96-500
Site Planning and Preparation
I-E96-717
Computer-Aided Drawing/Text (CAD/TXT)
(Release 5.2.21)
I-E97-811-1
LAN-90 Process Control View (PCV) (Release 4.3)
P-E21-001
Installing a 4-20 mA Transmitter in a Hazardous
Location
GLOSSARY OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
1-8
INTRODUCTION
Table 1-2. Reference Documents (continued)
Document No.
Title
WBPEEUI310008A0 CCAD01 Command CAD Configuration Tools
(Release 2.0)
WBPEEUI310013B0 WCAD01 Module Configuration Tools (Release 2.0)
NOTE:
1. Release 5.3 is recommended for 100% functionality.
NOMENCLATURE
Table 1-3. Nomenclature
Position
Type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
S L C _
2
_
_
_
Strategic Loop Controller
Inputs
0
Standard inputs, no special input board
2
Two direct low level inputs in place of AI3 and AI4 (frequency/pulse
input included, switch selectable)1,2
Serial Interface Connection3
0
Front access
1
Front or termination board access
CE Mark
0
No CE Mark approval
A
CE Mark approval
0 Reserved for future use
NOTES:
1. An optional input board contains circuitry which allows DI3 to accept a frequency input and 2 temperature modules for direct temperature
inputs. Actual use of AI3, AI4 and DI3 remains jumper selectable with the option board installed.
2. Use of the option board does not change the I/O count of the controller. The optional input board contains circuitry for a frequency/pulse
input and 2 temperature modules for direct temperature inputs. Hardware jumpers (refer to Appendix D) and menu options permit selecting
the function of DI3, AI3 and/or AI4. Digital input DI3 may be used as a digital or frequency input. Analog input AI3 and AI4 are each selectable
as a high level or low level input.
3. Front access requires serial interface adapter Part No. 6643192_1
SPECIFICATIONS
Table 1-4. Specifications
Property
Characteristic/Value
Inputs
Analog inputs:
Quantity available
Signal range
Input type
Input accuracy
A/D resolution
Input impedance
Common mode voltage limit
Common mode noise rejection
Ambient temperature effect
4
1-5 VDC, 4-20 mA
Isolated, self-calibrating; internally or externally powered
±0.2% of span
12 bits
>1 MΩ
30 V rms maximum
-60 dB at 60 Hz, ±120 VAC rms or ±168 VDC
±0.2% of span/50°C
NOMENCLATURE
1-9
INTRODUCTION
Table 1-4. Specifications (continued)
Property
Characteristic/Value
Inputs (continued)
Digital inputs:
Quantity available
Valid high input range
Valid low input range
Input type
Minimum on/off time
Maximum current
3
10-24 VDC
0-1.7 VDC
Opto-isolated 0-36 VDC; internally or externally powered
500 msec
4.7 mA at 24 VDC
Optional inputs:
Direct temperature/mV inputs:
Quantity available
Signal ranges
Accuracy
Input type
Linearized input elements:
Thermocouple
RTD
Millivolt
Frequency/pulse input:
Quantity available
Input type
Valid high input range:
24 V
5V
Valid low input range:
24 V
5V
Maximum frequency
Minimum pulse width
Up to 2 (in place of standard analog inputs)
Refer to Figures 1-7 and 1-8
Refer to Figures 1-7 and 1-8
Isolated, user-calibrated
Types J, K, T, S, E, R, N and Chinese E, S (Type N thermocouple
requires controller software rev D_0 or higher)
100 Ω platinum:
European Std. (DIN)
(alpha = 0.00385)
U.S. Ind. Std. (SAMA) (alpha = 0.00391)
120 Ω Ni Chem Pure
(alpha = 0.00672)
NOTE: RTD input may be affected up to 10% by RFI at 30-45 MHz and
75-85 MHz.
-20 to +80 mV (linear)
1 (in place of standard digital input DI3)
5 or 24 VDC; opto-isolated 0-36 VDC; internally or externally powered
14 to 30 V
3.5 to 8 V
-50 to 6 V
-50 to 2.3 V
50 kHz (minimum period = 20 µsec)
10 µsec
Outputs
Analog outputs:
Quantity available
Signal range
Output accuracy
Output load:
Current mode
Voltage mode
2
1-5 VDC, 4-20 mA
±0.2% of span
<700 Ω
>250 kΩ
Digital outputs:
Quantity available
Load current
Output type
SPECIFICATIONS
1 - 10
4
80 mA maximum at 24 VDC
Opto-isolated, open-collector transistor
INTRODUCTION
Table 1-4. Specifications (continued)
Property
Characteristic/Value
Power supply requirements
Jumper selectable
24 VDC ±10%
Factory default
90-130 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Jumper selectable
180-260 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption
Controller (includes analog
outputs and digital inputs)
830 mA at 24 VDC
433 mA at 120 VAC
280 mA at 240 VAC
Analog inputs
80 mA at 24 VDC (4 powered analog inputs)
Digital outputs
320 mA at 24 VDC (4 powered digital outputs)
Accessories:
Loop bypass station
Module bus extender
CLB01: 100 mA at 24 VDC
CBE01: 112 mA at 24 VDC
Internal power supply limit
Combined current draw from the analog inputs, digital outputs, and
accessories is limited to 500 mA
Inrush current
<20 A at 120 VAC (1 cycle at 60 Hz)
<12 A at 240 VAC (1 cycle at 60 Hz)
<10 A at 24 VDC
Overcurrent protection
Power supply board fuses
F101, 3 A 250 V (AC power interrupt)
F102, 2 A slow blow, 250 V (DC output power interrupt)
Main board fuse
F1, 2.5 A 250 V (external DC power interrupt)
Configuration execution rate
Factory default = 4 scans/sec
Faster rates can be selected by the user
Execution rate is dependent on configuration size
NVRAM memory
16 kbytes nonvolatile static RAM
Serial communication
Serial protocol
ABB module bus; bi-directional, 2-wire, 83 kbaud
RS-232-C, 9-pin serial interface; 1.2 through 19.2 kbaud
Maximum number of
addressable units per bus
32
Peer-to-peer communication
Standard
Communication to PC
Available through serial interface, CIC01 Computer Interface Command
Module or across plant communications loop
Faceplate display
Vacuum fluorescent graphic display, 64 × 128 pixels
Electrical connections
Rear of case
Compression type, lugless, 24-14 AWG
Mounting
Flush panel mount
Size
Faceplate
72 mm × 144 mm (2.82 in. × 5.67 in.)
Depth
428 mm (16.83 in.) standard, 453 mm (17.83 in.) for CE Mark approval
Size standard
Conforms to DIN Standard 43700 (standard depth)
Weight
3.6 kg (8 lb.)
SPECIFICATIONS
1 - 11
INTRODUCTION
Table 1-4. Specifications (continued)
Property
Characteristic/Value
Environmental constraints
Temperature:
Operating
Storage
0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)
-20° to +70°C (-4° to +158°F)
Relative humidity
10% to 95% noncondensing
RFI effect
<2.5% output effect for 4-1000 MHz at 5 V/m (high level)
Type SLC termination unit
spacings
Circuit
Mains
I/O
Enclosure classification
Agency certifications
Max. Volts
Installation Category1
130 rms
III
250 rms
II
26.4 VDC
III
30 V
III
NEMA 1
2
CSA (Canadian Standards
Association)
Certified for ordinary (nonhazardous) locations
Certified for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
CSA (NRTL3)
Certified for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
CE mark
Type SLC_2_A controllers comply with all applicable European Community product requirements, specifically those required to display the CE
marking on the product nameplate.
Accessories
Configuration and tuning
terminal
Handheld unit that provides system configuration, monitoring, tuning and
diagnostics. Order by nomenclature: Type CTT.
Blank cartridge
Configuration storage cartridge for the Type CTT Configuration and Tuning Terminal. Order by part no.: 6637531_1.
Loop bypass station
Maintenance tool that provides direct manual control of the process.
Order by nomenclature: Type CLB01.
Module bus extender
Increases module bus distance from 10 meters to 610 meters (33 ft. to
2,000 ft.). Order by nomenclature: Type CBE01.
ESD field service kit
For personnel working on equipment containing static sensitive devices.
Includes static dissipative work mat, ground cord assembly, alligator clip
and wrist bands. Order by part no.: 1948385_1.
Retrofit mounting kit
Type CLC case adapter. Contains hardware that allows a Type CLC case
to accept a Type SLC faceplate and board assembly. Order by part no.:
258568_1.
Temperature/frequency input
board
Permits 2 direct low level inputs in place of AI3 and AI4. Permits 1 frequency/pulse input in place of DI3. Order by part no.: 6640367_1
(requires software rev B_1 or higher).
Frequency input board4
Permits 1 frequency/pulse input in place of DI3. Order by part no.:
6640367_2 (requires software rev B_1 or higher).
Serial interface adapter
Provides interface between serial output of IBM compatible PC and Type
SLC controller when front access serial interface connection is required.
Order by part no.: 6643192_1 (requires software rev D_0 or higher).
SPECIFICATIONS
1 - 12
INTRODUCTION
Table 1-4. Specifications (continued)
Property
Characteristic/Value
Serial interface board
Permits serial interface connection to be made to RS-232-C connector
located on termination board. Order by part no.: 6643046_1 (requires
software rev D_0 or higher.
NOTES:
1. Installation category per IEC 1010-1.
2. Hazardous location approvals are for ambient conditions of 86 to 108 kPa (12.47 to 15.66 psi), 21% O2 max., and -25° to 40°C (-13° to
104°F). If the normal temperature range of this product is not within these temperature limits, the temperature rating of the product takes
precedence.
3. NRTL (Nationally Recognized Test Lab). OSHA designation for approved test lab.
4. Optional inputs are hardware/software selectable.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
0 °F
-4 00 -2 00
1 0 0 0 °F
2 00
4 00
6 00
TY P E J
8 00
TY P E S
TY P E N
± 0 .9°F
± 2 .16 °F
± 1 .8°F
± 6 .8°F
± 7 .0°F
± 2 .0°F
C H IN E SE E
± 4 .5°F
± 6 .8°F
± 6 .3°F
± 8 .3°F
± 1 .4°F
± 0 .9°F
C H IN E SE S
± 6 .8°F
100 Ω
P L AT IN U M
E U RO PE A N
S TD. (D IN )
(A L P H A = 0 .0 03 8 5 )
± 0 .61 °F
100 Ω
P L AT IN U M
U.S. ST D.
(A L P H A = 0 .0 03 9 1 )
± 0 .65 °F
120 Ω
N IC K EL
(A L P H A = 0 .0 06 7 2 )
3 20 0 3 40 0 3 60 0
± 1 .3°F
TY P E E
TY P E R
3 0 0 0 °F
2 20 0 2 40 0 2 60 0 2 80 0
± 1 .1°F
TY P E K
TY P E T
2 0 0 0 °F
1 20 0 1 40 0 1 60 0 1 80 0
± 5 .4°F
± 0 .36 °F
T0 2 1 4 0 A
NOTE: Temperature accuracy shown does not include mV to degrees conversion accuracy. Testing performed with function code 182, S12
= 7. Shaded area of available measuring range cannot maintain accuracy stated.
Figure 1-7. Instrument Accuracy and Available Measuring Ranges
for Direct Temperature Inputs (Fahrenheit Scale)
SPECIFICATIONS
1 - 13
INTRODUCTION
0 °C
-2 00 -1 00
5 0 0 °C
1 00
2 00
3 00
TY P E J
4 00
7 00
8 00
9 00
1 5 0 0 °C
1 10 0 1 20 0 1 30 0 1 40 0
± 0 .7°C
TY P E E
± 0 .5°C
± 1 .2°C
± 1 .0°C
TY P E S
± 3 .8°C
± 2 .5°C
± 3 .8°C
TY P E R
± 3 .9°C
± 3 .5°C
± 4 .6°C
TY P E N
C H IN E SE E
± 1 .1°C
± 0 .8°C
± 0 .5°C
C H IN E SE S
± 3 .8°C
100 Ω
P L AT IN U M
E U RO PE A N
S TD. (D IN )
(A L P H A = 0 .0 03 8 5 )
± 0 .34 °C
100 Ω
P L AT IN U M
U.S. ST D.
(A L P H A = 0 .0 03 9 1 )
± 0 .36 °C
120 Ω
N IC K EL
(A L P H A = 0 .0 06 7 2 )
1 60 0 1 70 0 1 80 0
± 0 .6°C
TY P E K
TY P E T
1 0 0 0 °C
6 00
± 3 .0°C
± 0 .20 °C
T0 2 1 3 9 A
NOTE: Temperature accuracy shown does not include mV to degrees conversion accuracy. Testing performed with function code 182, S12
= 7. Shaded area of available measuring range cannot maintain accuracy stated.
Figure 1-8. Instrument Accuracy and Available Measuring Ranges
for Direct Temperature Inputs (Celsius Scale)
SPECIFICATIONS
1 - 14
SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION
INTRODUCTION
This section contains special handling procedures for boards with
semiconductor devices, inspection instructions for the equipment
shipped, special considerations required for mounting the controller in
a hazardous location and the physical mounting instructions.
It also provides information on AC/DC power wiring, analog and digital I/O wiring, grounding procedures, peer-to-peer communication
connections, the serial interface, and applicable switch settings on
the termination board.
NOTE: Installation personnel should be an electrician or a person
familiar with the National Electrical Code and local wiring regulations.
UNPACKING AND INSPECTION
Upon receipt of the shipment, the equipment should be examined for
possible damage in transit. If damage is found or there is evidence of
rough handling, a damage claim should be filed with the transportation company responsible. Also, the nearest ABB sales office should
be notified as soon as possible.
Carefully inspect the packing material before discarding it to make
certain that all mounting equipment and any special instructions or
paperwork have been removed. Careful handling and installation will
insure satisfactory performance of your unit.
Use the original packing material and container for storage. The storage environment should be protected and should be free from
extremes of temperature and high humidity and fall within the environmental constraints listed in Table 1-4.
SPECIAL HANDLING PROCEDURES
In addition to the normal precautions for storage and handling of electronic equipment, the Type SLC controller has special semiconductor
handling requirements. The controller contains electronic components that can be damaged from discharges of static electricity.
Therefore, do not touch the components on the circuit board if at all
possible. Ordinarily, the circuit will not be damaged if the circuit board
is handled by the edges.
INTRODUCTION
2-1
INSTALLATION
Semiconductor devices are subject to damage by static electricity.
Therefore, the following techniques should be observed during servicing, troubleshooting and repair.
1. Use antistatic bag. Most assemblies with semiconductor devices
are shipped in a special antistatic bag. Keep the assembly in the bag
as much as possible whenever the assembly is not in the system.
2. Assemblies containing semiconductor devices should be
removed from their antistatic protective containers only under the following conditions:
a. When at a designated static-free work station or when the
bag is grounded at the field site.
b. Only after the conductive area of container has been neutralized.
c. Only after firm contact with an antistatic mat and/or firmly
gripped by a grounded individual.
3. Personnel handling assemblies with semiconductor devices
should be neutralized to a static-free work station by a grounding
wrist strap that is connected to the station or to a good ground point at
the field site.
4. Do not allow clothing to make contact with static sensitive
devices. Most clothing generates static electricity.
5. Avoid touching edge connectors and components.
6. Avoid partial connection of static sensitive devices. Static sensitive devices can be damaged by floating leads, especially the power
supply connector. If an assembly must be inserted in a live system, it
should be done quickly. Do not cut leads or lift circuit paths when troubleshooting.
7. Ground test equipment.
8. Avoid static charges during maintenance. Make sure circuit board
is thoroughly clean around its leads but do not rub or clean with an
insulating cloth.
NOTE: An antistatic kit (ESD field service kit part number
1948385_1) is available for personnel working on devices containing semiconductor components. The kit contains a static dissipative
work surface (mat), a ground cord assembly, wrist bands and an alligator clip.
9. To avoid contamination of switch contacts that can result in
unnecessary circuit board malfunction, do not use a lead pencil to set
a dipswitch.
SPECIAL HANDLING PROCEDURES
2-2
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION LOCATION
The Type SLC controller is designed for flush panel mounting. The
enclosure must be mounted indoors, preferably in a control room
environment.
The installation site should be well lit, dry and vibration free, and conform to the environmental constraints listed in Table 1-4. Careful
placement of the controller will insure proper operation as well as
overall safety.
NOTE: Temperature is an important consideration. Allow for adequate air flow, especially if the controller is to be installed in an
enclosed area.
Care should be taken to avoid installations where conductive contaminants can accumulate on the surface of the printed circuit boards.
The Type SLC controller can be used with a 24 VDC supply or 120,
220 or 240 VAC line service. The proper power source must be made
available at the installation site.
Hazardous Locations
WARNING
Use this equipment only in those classes of hazardous locations listed on the nameplate. Uses in other hazardous locations can lead to unsafe conditions that can injure personnel
and damage equipment.
AVERTISSEMENT
L’équipement décrit ici ne doit être utilisé que dans les catégories d’emplacement dangereux identifiées sur la plaque signalétique.
Son
emploi
dans
tout
autre
catégorie
d’emplacement dangereux pourrait présenter des risques, et
provoquer des dommages matériels et des blessures.
The Type SLC controller is certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) and CSA (NRTL [nationally recognized test lab]). Refer
to Table 1-4.
Refer to the Installing a 4-20 mA Transmitter in a Hazardous
Location application guide (Table 1-2) for specific guidelines when
using an instrument in a Division 2 hazardous location.
Radio Frequency Interference
Most electronic equipment is influenced by radio frequency interference (RFI). Caution should be exercised with regard to the use of portable communications equipment in the area. ABB recommends
posting appropriate signs in your plant. Refer to the Site Planning
and Preparation instruction (Table 1-2) for additional information on
radio frequency interference.
INSTALLATION LOCATION
2-3
INSTALLATION
MOUNTING
The controller can be flush panel mounted, either as a single unit or
side-by-side for multiple units. Outline dimensions and panel cutout
requirements are shown in Figure 2-1.
NOTE: Temperature is an important consideration. Allow for adequate air flow, especially if the controller is to be installed in an
enclosed area.
Use a panel of sufficient thickness and strength for the application.
Panel strength must be carefully considered when mounting multiple
units. As the panel cutout becomes longer, the panel becomes
weaker and it may be necessary to install extra support.
If necessary, additional support can be added by running a piece of
angle iron along the bottom of the controller housing.
To install single or multiple mounted units in a prepared panel cutout:
1. Remove the mounting brackets from the top and bottom of the
controller housing.
2. Slide the housing through the panel opening. Support the weight
of the case and reassemble the mounting brackets on the housing,
making certain that the bushing in the mounting bracket assembly is
positioned in the mounting hole on the housing (Fig. 2-1). Tighten the
bracket screws until the housing is secure in the panel.
3. If installing multiple units, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all units are
installed.
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
Conduit knockouts (½-inch and ¾-inch) are located at the rear of the
controller housing. Under ideal conditions, the use of conduit and
shielded wire may not be required. However, to avoid noise problems,
it is recommended that power, signal and output wiring be enclosed in
conduit and separated. Just prior to entering the housing, rigid conduit should be terminated and a short length of flexible conduit should
be installed to reduce any stress.
The termination board is assembled to the rear of the housing and
provides plug-in terminal blocks for easy access when making wiring
connections in the field. The terminal blocks are keyed and marked to
prevent possible customer connection errors. The plug-in terminal
blocks have compression type, lugless connectors for making wiring
connections. Maximum wire gauge for the connector is 14 AWG.
MOUNTING
2-4
INSTALLATION
4 6.5 ± 0.5
1 .8 3 ± 0.0 20
K N O C KO U T F O R
3 /4 -IN . C O N D U IT
K N O C KO U T S F O R
1 /2 -IN . C O N D U IT
6 6.0 (+ 0 .0, -0 .5 )
2 .6 0 (+ 0 .00 , -0.0 2)
3 93 .7
M IN
1 5.5 0
S E E N OT E 1
4 27 .5 ± 0 .8 S E E N OT E 3 .
1 6.8 3 ± 0 .03
1 .5 M IN TO 25 .4 M A X
PA N E L TH IC K N E S S
0 .0 6 M IN TO 1 .00 M A X
A
1 43 .8 (+ 0 .2 , -0.3 )
5 .6 6 (± 0 .01 )
1 35 .7 ± 0 .3
5 .3 4 ± 0.0 1
A
M A X IM U M TO R Q U E = 4 N M (3 0 IN -LB )
M O U N TIN G B R A C KE T
S EC T IO N A -A
T E R M IN AT IO N B O AR D
A
+ 0 .00 , -0 .04
+ 0 .0, -1.0
TB1
1 38 .0 ± 1 .0
5 .4 3 ± 0.0 4
TB2
S1
PA N E L
C U TO U T
D IM E N S IO N S
F RO N T P L AT E
R E TA IN IN G
SCREW
SW 3
TB4
M E T R IC : A = (7 1.6 x N O. O F U N IT S ) – 3.6
E N G L ISH : A = (2.8 2 x N O . O F U N ITS ) – 0 .14
7 1.6 (+ 0 .0,-0 .3)
2 .8 2 (+ 0 .00 ,-0.0 1)
1 20 /22 0/2 40 VAC IN P U T
FR O N T V IE W
1 52 .4
M IN IM U M C LE A R A N C E
6 .0 0
D IM E N S IO N S
M IL LIM E T E R S
IN C H E S
TB3
2 4 V D C IN PU T
R E AR V IE W
(C O VE R R E M OVE D )
N OT E S :
1 . M IN IM U M C LE A R A N C E FO R AD J U S T M E N T S, IN SP E C T IO N ,
M A IN T E N A N C E AN D O PE R AT IO N R E Q U IR E D.
2 . W IR IN G M U S T H AV E A 7 5° C M IN IM U M T E M P E R AT U R E R AT IN G
A N D A V O LTA G E R AT IN G EQ U A L TO O R G R E AT E R T H A N T H E
H IG H E S T VO LTA G E P R E S E N T. W IR IN G O F C IR C U ITS 3 0 V R M S
O R L E SS N E E D N OT B E VO LTAG E R AT ED IF W IR IN G O F OT H E R
C IR C U IT S H A S A VO LTA G E R AT IN G O F D O U B LE O R G R E AT E R
T H A N T H E IR AC T UA L C IR C U IT VO LTAG E . M A X IM U M C U S TO M E R
W IR E S IZ E IS 14 AW G .
4 52 .9 ± 0 .8
3 . T H IS D IM E N S IO N IS
F O R C E M A R K AP P R OV E D
1 7.8 3 ± 0 .03
C O N T R O L LE R S .
T 02 1 71 A
Figure 2-1. External and Mounting Dimensions
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
2-5
INSTALLATION
The Type SLC controller has the capacity for seven inputs and six
outputs. For those applications requiring CSA compliance, if
more than nine two-wire inputs plus outputs are used, then some or
all of the wires must be reduced in size. The internal volume of the
wiring compartment is about 27 cubic inches. The following volume is
required for each conductor.
•
•
•
•
•
22 AWG 0.50 cubic inches.
20 AWG 0.75 cubic inches.
18 AWG 1.00 cubic inches.
16 AWG 1.25 cubic inches.
14 AWG 1.50 cubic inches.
The total number of conductors multiplied by each conductor's volume requirement should not exceed 27 cubic inches. This includes
the power conductors. If an interconnecting cable (such as used with
the Type CLB Loop Bypass Station) is used, then the total volume
should be reduced to 26 cubic inches.
NOTE: Once the wiring is completed, and always during operation,
the rear cover of the controller must be in place to maintain system
safety and accuracy. The cover prevents operator access to parts
which may cause an ignition capable arc, acts as an electrical shield
to reduce the effects of EMI/RFI, and helps minimize temperature
gradients. It is important that the cover be securely mounted during
normal use.
Power Wiring
Use the following procedures to complete the wiring and terminations
for the controller.
DC POWER WIRING
When using a DC supply, it must be hard wired by the user. It is recommended that all the power wiring be stranded copper conductor
and bear a voltage rating for the highest voltage present (either power
or signal) and a 75 degrees Centigrade (167 degrees Fahrenheit)
minimum rating.
NOTE: Wiring in extra low voltage circuits (<30 Vrms) need not be
voltage rated if wiring on the other circuits has a voltage rating more
than double the actual circuit voltage.
1. Remove terminal block TB2 from the termination board.
2. Connect the specified DC voltage (24 VDC, ±10%) to terminal
block TB2-2 (+) and TB2-1 (common) as shown in Figure 2-2.
3. Install terminal block TB2 onto the termination board.
4. Remove Terminal block TB3 from the termination board.
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
2-6
INSTALLATION
5. Connect the shield or ground wire to earth ground at TB3-4 ( )
or TB3-2 ( ). Connect jumper W110 shown in Figure 2-3 to the E4
position.
6. Install terminal block TB3 onto the termination board.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
T B1
T B2
A I1 P W R
A I1 +
A I1 –
A I2 P W R
A I2 +
A I2 –
A I3 P W R
A I3 +
A I3 –
A I4 P W R
A I4 +
A I4 –
AO 1 +
AO 1 –
AO 2 +
AO 2 –
M OD BUS
COM
M OD BUS
COM
DO1 +
DO1 –
DO2 +
DO2 –
DO3 +
DO3 –
DO4 +
DO4 –
D I1 P W R
D I1 +
D I1 –
D I2 P W R
D I2 +
D I2 –
D I3 P W R
D I3 +
D I3 –
COM
+ 2 4 V IN
COM
S1
I
I
I
I
V
V
1 0 11
A I1
A I2
A I3
A I4
AO 1
AO 2
NON
NON
NON
D I1
D I2
D I3
1
V
V
V
V
I
I
IS O
IS O
IS O
20
S3
O N P OW E R
O F F S W IT C H
T
B
4
1 2 3 4
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
T
B
3
T
B
4
1 2 3 4
T B1
TB2
A I1 P W R
A I1 +
A I1 –
A I2 P W R
A I2 +
A I2 –
A I3 P W R
A I3 +
A I3 –
A I4 P W R
A I4 +
A I4 –
AO 1 +
AO 1 –
AO 2 +
AO 2 –
M OD BUS
COM
M OD BUS
COM
DO 1 +
DO 1 –
DO 2 +
DO 2 –
DO 3 +
DO 3 –
DO 4 +
DO 4 –
D I1 P W R
D I1 +
D I1 –
D I2 P W R
D I2 +
D I2 –
D I3 P W R
D I3 +
D I3 –
CO M
+ 24 V IN
CO M
S1
I
I
I
I
V
V
10 11
A I1
A I2
A I3
A I4
AO 1
AO 2
NO N
NO N
NO N
D I1
D I2
D I3
1
V
V
V
V
I
I
IS O
IS O
IS O
20
S3
O N P OW E R
O F F S W IT C H
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+
–
DC POWER
(24 V D C )
T
B
3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
AC POW ER
(120, 220 O R
240 VAC )
T 02 1 35 A
Figure 2-2. DC and AC Power Supply Wiring Connections
E4
C O N N EC T JU M P ER W 1 10
TO E 3 F O R 120 VAC O R
2 20/240 VAC. C O N N E C T
J U M P E R W 1 10 TO E4 FO R
2 4 VD C .
W 110
E3
F1 02
W 1 01
FU S E F1 02
2 A , 2 50 V, S LO B LO W
(D C O U TP U T )
W 106
W 1 06
S TA PL E JU M P E R
F1 01
FU S E F1 01
3 A , 2 50 V
(AC LIN E )
W 1 01 S TA P LE J U M PE R
(C U T F O R 220 /2 40 VAC )
T 02 1 74 A
Figure 2-3. Power Supply Board
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
2-7
INSTALLATION
AC POWER WIRING
The unit is factory set for 120 VAC (nominal). Jumper W110 should be
connected to E3 (Fig. 2-3) for 120 VAC service. If 220 or 240 VAC is
required, remove the power supply board and cut and remove jumper
wire W101 (Fig. 2-3). It is recommended that the jumper wire be cut
such that it is completely removed from the circuit.
Either a standard three-prong grounded flexible CSA certified line
cord must be supplied by the user for power supply connection or the
AC supply must be hard wired.
1. If hard wiring the AC power supply, it is recommended that all
power wiring be stranded, copper conductor, No. 14 AWG, and bear a
suitable voltage rating for the highest voltage connected to the termination board (either signal or power) and a 75°C (167°F) minimum
rating. Wiring must be in accordance with the National Electrical
Code.
NOTE: If AC power is used, the system should not be powered from
a transformer which also powers large motor loads (over
5 horsepower) or any other type of equipment which will generate
line voltage surges and sags.
WARNING
Disconnect the AC line cord or power lines from the operating
branch circuit coming from the source before attempting electrical connections. Instruments powered by AC line voltage
constitute a potential for personnel injury due to electric
shock.
AVERTISSEMENT
Débranchez le cordon d’alimentation ou les câbles d’alimentation reliés au circuit de distribution avant d’entreprendre des
connexions électriques. Les instruments alimentés en courant
alternatif comportent un risque de choc électriques pouvant
provoquer des blessures.
2. Remove terminal block TB3 from the termination board.
3. Connect the specified line voltage (120, 220 or 240 VAC, 50 or 60
Hz) to terminal block TB3-1 (L1/H) on the termination board.
4. Connect the neutral conductor to terminal TB3-3 (L2/N).
5. Connect the ground wire to terminal TB3-2 (
).
6. Install terminal block TB3 onto the termination board.
Refer to Figure 2-2 for AC wiring connections.
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
2-8
INSTALLATION
REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY WIRING
The Type SLC controller does not require special settings or adjustments if redundancy in power supplies is needed. Both a 24 VDC
supply and a 120 VAC (220 or 240 VAC) supply can be wired to the
unit as described in AC POWER WIRING, thus providing continuous
power to the unit in case a supply fails. Jumper W110 should be set to
the E4 position for redundant power supply wiring. Additionally, a
blocking diode should be installed in series with the external DC
source to prevent back feeding to the external DC source from the
controller’s power (Fig. 2-2).
Grounding Procedures
Various grounding procedures for the controller are described in the
following sections.
AC SAFETY GROUND
It is the responsibility of the customer and/or their installation/wiring
contractor to insure that the controller, other associated control or test
equipment and all exposed conductive materials are properly
grounded in accordance with local, National Electrical Code or Canadian Electrical Code regulations and are not a hazard, including
under fault conditions, to operation and service personnel.
The Type SLC controller provides for a connection of an AC safety
grounding conductor (customer supplied) at TB3-4 ( ) on the termination unit.
NOTE: Because of the prevailing differences in soil conditions
throughout the world and differences in acceptable practices, it is
not within the scope of this instruction to describe grounding electrode systems. It is the responsibility of the customer to insure that a
grounding electrode system which is acceptable to the local building
and wiring codes exists at the facility where the Type SLC controller
is to be installed.
The NEC, Article 250, Section H, details requirements for grounding
electrode systems acceptable in the United States. The CEC, Section
10, paragraphs 700 through 712, details the requirements for grounding electrode systems acceptable in Canada.
NOTE: The structural metal frame of a building shall not be used as
the required equipment grounding conductor for the Type SLC controller.
1. To avoid possible misoperation due to multiple grounding connections, the Type SLC controller must not be mounted to structural
members which are at a different potential than the grounded circuit
of the site’s wiring system.
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
2-9
INSTALLATION
2. Where mounting to structural members cannot be avoided, the
structural members should be connected to the grounding circuit of
the premise wiring system in order to equalize any potential differences. This could include customer conduit which is connected to
structural steel or grounded at some other location and must be isolated.
3. Preferably, the controller may be isolated from the structural
members by the use of suitable insulating materials, provided a
potential difference of 30 Vrms or greater does not exist between the
structural members and the grounded parts of the equipment.
DC SYSTEM COMMON GROUND
Jumper W106 on the power supply board (Fig. 2-3) provides a connection for the DC system common to the earth ground. Jumper
W106 can be cut and removed to isolate system common from earth
ground.
For single controller installations (module bus is not connected to any
other Type SLC controller or an INFI 90 OPEN/Network 90 system),
single point grounding is obtained by jumper W106 remaining in place
on the power supply board.
If several Command Series controllers are connected through the
module bus communications link, the system commons are also connected by the module bus. Therefore, read and follow the instructions
for single point grounding.
SINGLE POINT GROUNDING
Single Controllers
Single point grounding of the Type SLC controller provides an analog
and digital DC grounding system free of circulating currents. Jumper
W106 on the power supply board (Fig. 2-3) connects the DC system
common to the AC grounding conductor terminal TB3-2 ( ). Jumper
W106 can be cut and removed to isolate DC system common from
AC ground.
Multiple Controllers
If several Type SLC controllers are connected through the module bus
communication link, then the system commons are also connected. For
a single point grounding system, system common must be tied to earth
ground only at one point. Cut and remove jumper W106 (Fig. 2-3) on
the power supply board of all controllers that are to be linked together
via the module bus. Use a separate 14 AWG jumper wire to connect the
DC system common (TB2-1) of each controller to an isolated system
common bus. From one point on the DC system common, use an eight
AWG wire to connect to a dedicated earth ground (Fig. 2-4). This dedicated earth ground should connect to the same grounding point as
the AC safety ground (typically the site grounding grid). There should
be no more than one-ohm resistance between the DC system
grounding conductor and the AC safety conductor.
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
2 - 10
INSTALLATION
NOTE: For a single point grounding system, system common of all
I/O devices that interface with the Type SLC controllers must be the
same potential as the Type SLC controller system common.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
TB1
A I1 P W R
A I1 +
A I1 –
A I2 P W R
A I2 +
A I2 –
A I3 P W R
A I3 +
A I3 –
A I4 P W R
A I4 +
A I4 –
AO 1 +
AO 1 –
AO 2 +
AO 2 –
MO D BUS
COM
MO D BUS
COM
TB2
DO1 +
DO1 –
DO2 +
DO2 –
S1
DO3 +
10 11
DO3 –
I A I1 V
DO4 +
I A I2 V
DO4 –
I A I3 V
D I1 P W R
I A I4 V
D I1 +
V AO 1 I
D I1 –
V AO 2 I
D I2 P W R
D I2 +
N O N D I1 IS O
N O N D I2 IS O D I2 –
N O N D I3 IS O D I3 P W R
D I3 +
1 20
D I3 –
S3
COM
O N P OW E R + 2 4 V IN
O F F S W IT C H C O M
T
B
4
1 2 3 4
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
T
B
3
T
B
4
1 2 3 4
TB1
A I1 P W R
A I1 +
A I1 –
A I2 P W R
A I2 +
A I2 –
A I3 P W R
A I3 +
A I3 –
A I4 P W R
A I4 +
A I4 –
AO 1 +
AO 1 –
AO 2 +
AO 2 –
MO D BUS
COM
MO D BUS
COM
TB2
DO1 +
DO1 –
DO2 +
DO2 –
S1
DO3 +
10 11
DO3 –
I A I1 V
DO4 +
I A I2 V
DO4 –
I A I3 V
D I1 P W R
I A I4 V
D I1 +
V AO 1 I
D I1 –
V AO 2 I
D I2 P W R
D I2 +
N O N D I1 IS O
N O N D I2 IS O D I2 –
N O N D I3 IS O D I3 P W R
D I3 +
1 20
D I3 –
S3
COM
O N P OW E R + 2 4 V IN
O F F S W IT C H C O M
1 2 3 4
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
T
B
3
T
B
4
1 2 3 4
TB1
A I1 P W R
A I1 +
A I1 –
A I2 P W R
A I2 +
A I2 –
A I3 P W R
A I3 +
A I3 –
A I4 P W R
A I4 +
A I4 –
AO 1 +
AO 1 –
AO 2 +
AO 2 –
MOD BUS
COM
MOD BUS
COM
TB2
DO1 +
DO1 –
DO2 +
DO2 –
S1
DO3 +
10 11
DO3 –
I A I1 V
DO4 +
I A I2 V
DO4 –
I A I3 V
D I1 P W R
I A I4 V
D I1 +
V AO 1 I
D I1 –
V AO 2 I
D I2 P W R
D I2 +
N O N D I1 IS O
N O N D I2 IS O D I2 –
N O N D I3 IS O D I3 P W R
D I3 +
1 20
D I3 –
S3
COM
O N P OW E R + 2 4 V IN
O F F S W IT C H C O M
T
B
3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
N O TE 5
N O TE 5
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
N O TE 5
N O TE 4
N O TE 2
AC S AF ET Y C O M M O N
N O TE 5
S YS TE M C O M M O N
N O TE 3
D E D IC AT ED
GROU ND
FO R
S AF ET Y
CO MM O N
N O TES :
1 . C U T AN D R E M OV E J U M P ER W 1 0 6 O N P OW E R SU P P LY BO A R D O F AL L C O N TR O L L E R S TO BE L IN K ED
TO G E TH E R VIA M O D U L E BU S.
2 . C O N N E C T E AC H C O N TR O L L E R TO S Y ST EM C O M M O N BU S U S IN G N O. 1 4 AW G W IR E.
3 . C O N N E C T S YS TE M C O M M O N B U S TO E ART H G R O U N D AT O N LY O N E P O IN T U S IN G N O . 8 AW G W IR E .
4 . M O D U L E B U S W IR E S S H O U LD B E T W IS TE D S H IEL D E D PAIR , S TR A N D E D W IR E S IN SU L ATE D W IT H L OW L EA K AG E
IN S U L AT IO N M ATER IA L S. SH IE L D S SH O U L D BE G R O U N D ED AT O N E E N D O N LY U SIN G O N E O F T H E TW O S C R EW S
L O C ATE D IN U P PE R C O R N ER S O F TER M IN ATIO N U N IT. M IN IM U M W IR E S IZ E F O R TH E S E C O N N EC TIO N S IS
N O . 1 8 AW G W IR E.
5 . TB 3 -2 A N D TB 3-4 AR E AC S AF ET Y G RO U N D S. AC S A FE TY G R O U N D B U S IS TO B E C O N N E C TE D TO G RO U N D E D
C IR C U IT O F W IR IN G S YS TE M O F S ITE U S IN G N O . 6 AW G W IR E T YP IC A L .
T 02 13 6 A
Figure 2-4. Recommended Single Point Grounding System
The isolated system common bus should be grounded by use of a
dedicated grounding electrode, i.e., a grounding electrode separate
from the alternating current (safety ground) grounding electrode.
There should be no greater than one-ohm resistance between the
dedicated grounding electrode for the DC single point grounding system and the alternating current (safety ground) grounding electrode.
NOTE: Where it is not possible to provide a dedicated grounding
electrode for system common, then connection to the site’s grounding electrode must be by a grounding conductor used for no other
purpose (no other equipment may be grounded through the same
grounding conductor).
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
2 - 11
INSTALLATION
Input/Output Wiring
This section provides instructions for analog and digital I/O wiring.
ANALOG I/O WIRING
Wiring used for analog inputs must be carefully chosen, with consideration for environmental and electrical conditions.
•
•
•
Shielded (overall or individually) twisted-pair wires for low level
signal conduction are recommended to reduce the effects of electromagnetic and electrostatic noise coupling.
An aluminum Mylar® type with a drain wire has a very good electrostatic coupling shield efficiency.
All shields must be electrically insulated from other shields.
Shields are to be grounded at one of the two screws located in the
lower corners of the termination board.
NOTE: The field end of the shield should not be connected to a
ground.
•
•
•
•
•
•
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
2 - 12
Conduit is recommended for the field portion of the run. Wherever
practical, it is recommended that trays containing analog signals
be devoted exclusively to that use. Conduit containing analog signals should cross power lines, etc., at right angles and remain
perpendicular for at least ten times the diameter of the crossed
element on either side of the crossing joints.
Maximum wire gauge for the plug-in connectors on the rear of the
controller is 14 AWG.
Connect the analog inputs and outputs using the external wiring
label (Fig. 2-5) on the inside of the rear cover as a guideline for
terminal block assignments.
When connecting 2-wire RTDs to AI3/AI4 with the optional temperature input board, connect RTD COM1/RTD COM2 to AI3+/
AI4+ respectively. When connecting 3-wire RTDs to AI3/AI4, connect the third wire to RTD COM1/RTD COM2.
INSTALLATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
T B1
T B2
A I1 P W R
A I1 +
A I1 –
A I2 P W R
A I2 +
A I2 –
A I3 P W R
A I3 +
A I3 –
A I4 P W R
A I4 +
A I4 –
AO 1 +
AO 1 –
AO 2 +
AO 2 –
MOD BUS
COM
MOD BUS
COM
DO1 +
DO1 –
DO2 +
DO2 –
DO3 +
DO3 –
DO4 +
DO4 –
D I1 P W R
D I1 +
D I1 –
D I2 P W R
D I2 +
D I2 –
D I3 P W R
D I3 +
D I3 –
COM
+ 2 4 V IN
COM
S1
I
I
I
I
V
V
10 11
A I1
A I2
A I3
A I4
AO 1
AO 2
D I1
D I2
D I3
NON
NON
NON
1
V
V
V
V
I
I
IS O
IS O
IS O
20
S3
O N P OW E R
O F F S W ITC H
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
T
B
4
T
B
3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
T 02 13 7 A
Figure 2-5. External Wiring Label
Wiring must bear a suitable voltage rating for the highest voltage connected to the termination board (either signal or power) and a 75°C
(167°F) minimum rating. Wiring must be in accordance with the
National Electrical Code. Refer to Figures 2-6 through 2-12 for typical
analog input/output connection examples.
+24 V
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
TB1
AI !
PWR
XMTR
150 Ω
3W
+
S1-7, 8, 9, 10
CLOSED
+
–
250 Ω
3W
–
MUX
TB2
COM
FIELD
TERMINATION BOARD
MAIN BOARD INPUT CIRCUITRY
TP80418A
Figure 2-6. Powered Four to 20 Milliamp Analog Input
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
2 - 13
INSTALLATION
+24 V
150 Ω
3W
TERMINAL
BLOCK
TB1
AI !
+
S1-7, 8, 9, 10
CLOSED
PWR
+
–
MUX
250 Ω
3W
XMTR
–
FIELD
TERMINATION BOARD
MAIN BOARD INPUT CIRCUITRY
TP80419B
Figure 2-7. Unpowered or Field Powered Four to 20 Milliamp Analog Input
+24 V
150 Ω
3W
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
TB1
AI !
+
S1-7, 8, 9, 10
OPEN
PWR
+
–
MUX
250 Ω
3W
XMTR
–
TB2
COM
FIELD
TERMINATION BOARD
MAIN BOARD INPUT CIRCUITRY
TP80420B
Figure 2-8. Single Ended Voltage Input
DIGITAL I/O WIRING
1. Digital input wires should be twisted-pair, stranded wires insulated with low leakage insulation materials.
2. Individually shielded pairs provide greater protection against noise
and crosstalk than nonindividually shielded pairs.
3. Shields are to be grounded at one of the two screws located in
the lower corners of the termination board.
NOTE: The field end of the shield should not be connected to a
ground.
4. Maximum wire gauge for the plug-in connectors on the rear of the
controller is 14 AWG.
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
2 - 14
INSTALLATION
Connect digital inputs and outputs using the external wiring label (Fig.
2-5) on the inside of the rear cover as a guideline for terminal block
assignments. Refer to Figures 2-13 through 2-15 for typical digital
input/output connections examples.
NOTE: Digital inputs are not individually fused. Refer to Table 1-4 for
maximum rating.
+24 V
TERMINAL
BLOCK
TB1
AI !
PWR
150 Ω
3W
+
–
MUX
250 Ω
3W
XMTR
–
FIELD
+
S1-7, 8, 9, 10
OPEN
TERMINATION BOARD
MAIN BOARD INPUT CIRCUITRY
TP80421B
Figure 2-9. Differential Voltage Analog Input
Wiring must bear a suitable voltage rating for the highest voltage connected to the termination board (either signal or power) and a 75
degrees Centigrade (167 degrees Fahrenheit) minimum rating. Wiring must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
AI3
AI4
S1-8
S1-7
OPEN/OFF OPEN/OFF
+
TB1-8
TB1-11
–
TB1-9
TB1-12
+
TB1-8
TB1-11
–
TB1-9
TB1-12
+
TB1-8
TB1-11
–
TB1-9
TB1-12
RTDCOM
TB4-3
TB4-4
+
TB1-8
TB1-11
–
TB1-9
TB1-12
THERMOCOUPLE
mV
2-WIRE RTD
RTD
RTD
3-WIRE RTD
RTDCOM
TB4-3
TB4-4
TP80521A
Figure 2-10. Thermocouple, Millivolt and RTD Inputs
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
2 - 15
INSTALLATION
+24 V
TERMINAL
BLOCK
FINAL
ELEMENT
TB1
S1-5, 6
OPEN
250 Ω
AO !
+
AO !
–
ACOM
MAIN BOARD
OUTPUT CIRCUITRY
TERMINATION BOARD
TP80006B
Figure 2-11. Analog Output in Current Mode
+24 V
TERMINAL
BLOCK
TB1
AO !
+
AO !
–
FINAL
ELEMENT
S1-5, 6 CLOSED
250 Ω
ACOM
MAIN BOARD
OUTPUT CIRCUITRY
TERMINATION BOARD
TP80007B
Figure 2-12. Analog Output in Voltage Mode
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
2 - 16
INSTALLATION
+24 V
+5 V
TERMINAL
BLOCK
TB2
DI !
PWR
+
–
S1-1, 2, 3
CLOSED
FIELD
TERMINATION BOARD
MAIN BOARD
INPUT CIRCUITRY
TP80423B
Figure 2-13. Digital Inputs in Nonisolated Mode
+24 V
+24 V
(EXTERNAL)
+5 V
TERMINAL
BLOCK
TB2
DI !
PWR
+
–
S1-1, 2, 3
OPEN
FIELD
TERMINATION BOARD
MAIN BOARD
INPUT CIRCUITRY
TP80424B
Figure 2-14. Digital Inputs in Isolated Mode
Peer-to-Peer Communication Wiring
1. The module bus wires for connecting multiple Type SLC controllers should be twisted-pair stranded wires insulated with low leakage
insulation materials.
WIRING REQUIREMENTS
2 - 17
INSTALLATION
+5 V
+24 V
DI !
PWR
LOAD
TERMINAL
BLOCK
TB2
DO !
+
DO !
–
COM
MAIN BOARD
OUTPUT CIRCUITRY
TERMINATION BOARD
TP80422A
Figure 2-15. Digital Output Circuitry
2. Individually shielded pairs are recommended to provide greater
protection against noise and crosstalk than nonindividually shielded
pairs.
3. For each section of cable, the shield is to be grounded on one
end only. To ground the shield, one of the two screws at the lower corners of the termination board or TB3-4 should be used.
4. Maximum wire gauge for the plug-in connectors on the rear of the
controller is 14 AWG.
5. Connect multiple Type SLC controllers via the module bus connections using Figure 2-16 as a guideline for terminal block assignments. Type CBE01 Module Bus Extenders must be used if the
module bus length is more than 10 meters (32.8 feet) or where
ground potentials cannot be avoided. Total maximum module bus distance with the Type CBE01 extender is 610 meters (2,000 feet). Refer
to Figures 1-4, 1-5 and 1-6 for location of the module bus extenders in
the communication loop.
NOTE: The 1.8-meter (6-foot) cord of the Type CTT Configuration
and Tuning Terminal must be included in the 10-meter distance.
PRE-OPERATING ADJUSTMENTS
Prior to starting the setup and configuration procedures, switch settings on the termination board, and jumper settings on the main,
optional input and serial interface (if supplied) boards are required.
PRE-OPERATING ADJUSTMENTS
2 - 18
INSTALLATION
M O D U LE
BUS
COM MON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
TB1
A I1 P W R
A I1 +
A I1 –
A I2 P W R
A I2 +
A I2 –
A I3 P W R
A I3 +
A I3 –
A I4 P W R
A I4 +
A I4 –
AO 1 +
AO 1 –
AO 2 +
AO 2 –
MO D BUS
COM
MO D BUS
COM
TB2
DO1 +
DO1 –
DO2 +
DO2 –
S1
DO3 +
10 11
DO3 –
I A I1 V
DO4 +
I A I2 V
DO4 –
I A I3 V
D I1 P W R
I A I4 V
D I1 +
V AO 1 I
D I1 –
V AO 2 I
D I2 P W R
D I2 +
N O N D I1 IS O
D I2 –
N O N D I2 IS O
N O N D I3 IS O D I3 P W R
D I3 +
1 20
D I3 –
S3
COM
O N P OW E R + 2 4 V IN
O F F S W IT C H C O M
T
B
4
1 2 3 4
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
T
B
3
T
B
4
1 2 3 4
TB1
A I1 P W R
A I1 +
A I1 –
A I2 P W R
A I2 +
A I2 –
A I3 P W R
A I3 +
A I3 –
A I4 P W R
A I4 +
A I4 –
AO 1 +
AO 1 –
AO 2 +
AO 2 –
MO D BUS
COM
MO D BUS
COM
1 2 3 4
TB2
DO1 +
DO1 –
DO2 +
DO2 –
S1
DO3 +
10 11
DO3 –
I A I1 V
DO4 +
I A I2 V
DO4 –
I A I3 V
D I1 P W R
I A I4 V
D I1 +
V AO 1 I
D I1 –
V AO 2 I
D I2 P W R
D I2 +
N O N D I1 IS O
D I2 –
N O N D I2 IS O
N O N D I3 IS O D I3 P W R
D I3 +
1 20
D I3 –
S3
COM
O N P OW E R + 2 4 V IN
O F F S W IT C H C O M
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
T
B
3
T
B
4
1 2 3 4
W IR E C O N N EC T IN G
C A B LE S H IE LD TO G R O U N D
TB1
A I1 P W R
A I1 +
A I1 –
A I2 P W R
A I2 +
A I2 –
A I3 P W R
A I3 +
A I3 –
A I4 P W R
A I4 +
A I4 –
AO 1 +
AO 1 –
AO 2 +
AO 2 –
MOD BUS
COM
MOD BUS
COM
TB2
DO1 +
DO1 –
DO2 +
DO2 –
S1
DO3 +
10 11
DO3 –
I A I1 V
DO4 +
I A I2 V
DO4 –
I A I3 V
D I1 P W R
I A I4 V
D I1 +
V AO 1 I
D I1 –
V AO 2 I
D I2 P W R
D I2 +
N O N D I1 IS O
D I2 –
N O N D I2 IS O
N O N D I3 IS O D I3 P W R
D I3 +
1 20
D I3 –
S3
COM
O N P OW E R + 2 4 V IN
O F F S W IT C H C O M
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
T
B
3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
M O U N TIN G S C R E W
T 02 13 8 A
Figure 2-16. Peer-to-Peer Communications Wiring Connections
Always use proper safety precautions when working near the wiring
connections.
NOTE: A power switch, S3 (Fig. 2-16), is located on the termination
board to allow the external power supply (AC or DC) to be disconnected from the controller without removing the power supply wiring.
Termination Board Switch Settings
With the rear cover of the controller removed, there is a bank of
switches (S1) exposed on the termination board (Fig. 2-17). These
switches provide analog I/O options and digital input options.
NOTE: Switch S1 is installed upside down. Take care to note the orientation when setting the switches.
ANALOG INPUTS
1. Remove power. The four left switches, S1-10 through S1-7, allow
either a voltage input or a current input to be applied to the analog
inputs. They are factory set for a voltage input.
NOTE: S1-7 and S1-8 must be in the off position when using AI3
and AI4 for low level inputs.
2. Place the switches in the off position for the analog inputs to
accept a voltage input.
3. Place the switches in the on position for the analog inputs to
accept a current input.
PRE-OPERATING ADJUSTMENTS
2 - 19
INSTALLATION
TB 1
2
TB 2
R9
1
20
19
R10
18
3
4
17
P3
5
16
6
15
7
14
13
8
S1
9
12
10
11
11
10
12
9
P5
13
8
14
7
15
6
16
5
SW 3
17
4
ON
18
SW IT C H S 3
EX T ER N A L P OW E R SU P PLY
O N /O FF S W ITC H
3
19
2
20
1
SW IT C H S 1
AN ALO G IN PU T O P TION S
AN ALO G O U TP U T O PT IO N S
D IG ITA L IN P U T O PT IO N S
(S E E N O T E )
1
OFF
2
3
4
TB 4
1
2
3
4
TB 3
N O TE :
SW IT C H S 1 IS IN STA LL E D U P SID E D O W N .
T 02 1 42 A
Figure 2-17. Termination Board Switch Locations
ANALOG OUTPUTS
1. Remove power. Set switch S1-6 (AO1) and S1-5 (AO2) to select
either a current or a voltage output. They are factory set for a voltage
output.
2. Place the switch in the on position for a voltage output.
3. Place the switch in the off position for a current output.
PRE-OPERATING ADJUSTMENTS
2 - 20
INSTALLATION
DIGITAL INPUTS
1. Remove power. Switches S1-3 through S1-1 allow selection of isolated or nonisolated inputs for DO1 through DO3. The switches are
factory set for isolated inputs.
2. Place the switch in the off position to select an isolated input.
3. Place the switch in the on position to select a nonisolated input.
Table 0-1 provides a summary of the option settings for the termination board.
Table 0-1. Termination Board Summary of Options Settings1
Option
Analog input 1
Analog input 2
Analog input 3
Analog input 4
Analog output 1
Analog output 2
Control
Setting2
S1-10
S1-9
S1-8
S1-7
S1-6
S1-5
Description
On
Current input
Off
Voltage input
On
Current input
Off
Voltage input
On
Current input
Off
Voltage input
On
Current input
Off
Voltage input
On
Voltage output
Off
Current output
On
Voltage output
Off
Current output
Figures 2-6 through 2-10
Figures 2-11 and 2-12
(None)
S1-4
None
Not used
Digital input 1
S1-3
Off
Isolated input
On
Nonisolated input
Digital input 2
S1-2
Off
Isolated input
On
Nonisolated input
Off
Isolated input
On
Nonisolated input
Digital input 3
S1-1
Sample Switch Configuration
Figure No.
—
Figures 2-13 and 2-14
NOTES:
1. Bold text indicates factory settings.
2. Off = open, on = closed.
Main Board Jumper Settings
Figure 2-18 shows the main board jumper settings that apply when
using the optional input board, the serial interface, or both.
PRE-OPERATING ADJUSTMENTS
2 - 21
INSTALLATION
D E FAU LT
H IG H L E V EL
IN P U T
1 2 3 4 5
J5
A I3
TE M PE R ATU R E
IN P U T
1 2 3 4 5
J5
A I3
J4
A I3
J4
A I3
J6
A I4
J6
A I4
J3
A I4
J3
A I4
O N LY W IT H
O P T IO N A L
IN P U T B O AR D
FR O N T
AC C E SS
3
2
1
J7
S ER IA L P O RT
J U MP E R
TE R M IN ATIO N
B O AR D
AC C E SS
3
2
1
J7
R IB BO N C A BL E
TO O P E R ATO R
IN TE R FAC E B O AR D
P4
J7
P8
J5
J4
J6
J3
P7
U24
O P TIO N A L IN P U T
B O AR D J U M P ER S
FU S E F1
2 .5 A, 2 5 0 V
(IN T ER N A L D C
P OW E R IN TE R RU P T)
S ER IA L IN TE R FAC E
B O AR D C O N N E C TO R S
U54
U12
O P TIO N A L IN P U T
B O AR D C O N N E C TO R
J1
J2
D E FAU LT
S TA N DAR D
IN P U T
1 2 3
J1
D I3
J2
D I3
P6
D I3 /P 1 IN P U T
FR E Q U E N C Y
IN P U T
1 2 3
J1
D I3
J2
D I3
O N LY W ITH
O P TIO N A L
IN P U T B O AR D
T 02 1 72 A
Figure 2-18. Main Board Jumper Settings
Optional Input Board Jumper Settings
Figure 2-19 shows the jumper settings for the optional input board.
Set the jumpers according to the type of input being used.
Serial Interface
The serial interface is accomplished in one of two ways. The Type
SLC_20 controller uses a serial interface adapter to connect between
a PC and the front of the controller. The Type SLC_21 controller contains a serial interface board that also allows direct connection to the
termination board on the rear of the controller. Front or termination
board access is jumper selectable.
The serial interface is intended for connection to a nine-pin RS-232-C
serial port. The serial port on the PC or other communication device
must have the pin-outs listed in Table 2-1.
PRE-OPERATING ADJUSTMENTS
2 - 22
INSTALLATION
TH E R M O C O U P L E IN P U T
1
2
A I3
A I4
PI
J3
J1
J5
J4
J2
J6
RT D IN P U T
3
1
2
0 -1 5 V P U L S E
1
2 3
J5
Fm ax = 4 K HZ
1 2 3
J6
0 -5 V P U L S E
1
2 3
J5
F m a x = 5 0 KH Z
1 2 3
J6
THE RM OC O U PL E IN PU T
3
1
2
R T D IN PU T
3
1
J3
J3
J1
J1
J4
J4
J2
J2
2
3
T 02 1 75 A
Figure 2-19. Optional Input Board Jumper Settings
Table 2-1. Serial
Port Pin-Outs
Pin
Signal
1
DCD
2
RXD
3
TXD
4
DTR
5
SG
6
DSR
7
RTS
8
CTS
9
RI
SERIAL INTERFACE ADAPTER
Type SLC_20 controllers are capable of communications with an IBM
compatible PC via the five-pin connector located on the front of the
controller. This connector is also used for the Type CTT terminal. The
serial interface adapter is required for connection.
The adapter consists of an assembly that converts RS-232-C logic
levels to the five-volt logic required by the controller. A nine-pin
RS-232-C cable provides for connection of the assembly to a PC, and
a second cable connects the assembly to the five-pin connector on
the front of the controller. An LED on the assembly indicates when the
serial interface is transmitting.
PRE-OPERATING ADJUSTMENTS
2 - 23
INSTALLATION
The adapter can determine the presence of the serial interface in the
controller. The LED is on continuously if the serial interface is not
present. This would be the case with previous versions of the Type
SLC controller or other Command Series modules. The LED is also
on continuously if the Type SLC controller is equipped with the serial
interface board for termination board access.
The serial interface adapter has no jumpers.
NOTE: Using the serial interface adapter requires that J7 on the
main board be set as shown in Figure 2-18.
SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD JUMPER SETTINGS
Type SLC_20 controllers are equipped with a serial interface board
that allows serial connection at P5 on the termination board at the
rear of the controller.
This board is mounted to the main board and converts RS-232-C
logic levels to the five-volt logic required by the controller. These signals are optically isolated. Use of this board allows access to the
serial interface at the nine-pin RS-232-C connector on the termination
board (P5).
The jumpers on the serial interface board allow connection to either
data terminal equipment (DTE) or data communication equipment
(DCE). The factory defaults are for the DTE connection that is
required for CCAD01 Command CAD Configuration Tools and
WCAD01 Module Configuration Tools operation.
Jumpers J1 through J5 are provided for unique handshaking options
that may be required based on the specific equipment being used.
Figure 2-20 shows a schematic of the jumper settings and their
related connections.
Jumper J5 is set based on the type of equipment being connected
and whether handshaking is required. Table 2-2 lists the jumper setting options for J5. Figure 2-21 shows the location and settings of J1
through J5.
Table 2-2. Serial Interface Board J5 Settings
Equipment Type
DTE (PC)
DCE (modem)
PRE-OPERATING ADJUSTMENTS
2 - 24
Handshaking
J5 Positions
No (default)
3-4, 5-6, 9-11, 10-12
Yes
3-4, 5-6, 7-9, 8-10
No
3-5, 4-6, 9-11, 10-12
Yes
3-5, 4-6, 7-9, 8-10
INSTALLATION
J5
RXD
T XD -T 1
R X D -T 1
1
RT S-T 1
11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T XD
2
RT S
P5 -2
P5 -3
P5 -7
12
C T S-T 1
CTS
P5 -8
+12 V D C
DCD
1
2
3
J4
DSR
1
2
3
2
3
2
3
P5 -4
J2
RI
1
P5 -6
J1
DTR
1
P5 -1
P5 -9
J3
SG
P5 -5
AC O M
T 02 2 51 A
Figure 2-20. Jumper Settings Schematic
PRE-OPERATING ADJUSTMENTS
2 - 25
INSTALLATION
J5
1
3
J5
4
2
1
3
J5
4
2
1
3
J5
4
2
1
3
4
2
5
6
5
6
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
11 9 1 0 12
D T E, N O
H A N D SH A KIN G
11 9 1 0 12
D T E,
H A N D SH A KIN G
11 9 1 0 12
DCE, NO
H A N D SH A KIN G
11 9 1 0 12
DCE,
H A N D SH A KIN G
J5
J4
J1
J2
J3
1
2
3
J4
J1
J2
J3
T 02 1 76 A
Figure 2-21. Serial Interface Board Jumper Settings
PRE-OPERATING ADJUSTMENTS
2 - 26
SECTION 3 - SETUP
INTRODUCTION
This section provides walk-through procedures for the menu-driven
controller setup. Setup worksheets are provided in Appendix B. It is
recommended that the worksheets be filled in prior to starting the
setup procedures. All the data will then be available to make the
entries.
NOTE: Setup personnel should have a solid background in electronics instrumentation and process control and be familiar with proper
safety procedures for electronic instrumentation.
SCREEN CONVENTIONS AND PUSHBUTTON FUNCTIONS
The screen displays illustrated in procedural steps throughout this
section contain circled numbers. Those numbers reference the step
number of the procedure and are not on the actual display.
Whenever there is more than one choice available to the user on a
screen display, the choices are bracketed [ ] on the screen illustration
or are located in the right margin.
The graphics of the screens presented are close representations, but
data may vary in size and position.
Pushbutton functions are shown in Figure 3-1.
Single Function Pushbuttons
The three marked pushbuttons at the bottom of the faceplate are single function keys.
s , t
Controls cursor movement, changes selection choices on screens,
and increments or decrements selected parameter values when
changing a numeric variable.
A/M
Does not perform any action in the setup screens.
SEL
Allows selecting a highlighted parameter in a menu. On screens with
variables instead of menus, it will cause the unit to enter the change
mode on the variable highlighted to change its value.
Multi-Function Soft Keys
Three unmarked soft keys directly below the display are multi-function keys. The specific function of these keys is defined by the graphics and will vary depending on the screen displayed. When no soft
key menu is displayed directly above the soft keys, touching any of
INTRODUCTION
3-1
SETUP
L2: MAN
L1: MAN
SETUP
LOOP 1
LOOP 2
MODBUS ADDR
D.O. LOCKOUT
SECURITY
DIAGNOSTIC
OPTIONS
BRIGHTNESS
UNMARKED
MULTI-FUNCTION
SOFT KEYS
SELECT
PUSHBUTTON
S
E
L
A
/
M
UP/DOWN
PUSHBUTTONS
AUTO/MANUAL
PUSHBUTTON
TP80432A
Figure 3-1. Setup Menu
these soft keys will display a soft key menu. Once this soft key menu
is displayed, pressing the soft key below the menu item desired will
initiate the defined action.
SETUP MENU OPTIONS SUMMARY
From the setup menu, several options are available. Following is a
brief description of each option (Fig. 3-1).
LOOP 1
Allows configuration of such items as tag name, process variable and
set point engineering units, maximum number of decimal places displayed, control output high and low tag, power up mode, power up
level for AO1, fail level for AO1, state of the audible alarm associated
with loop 1, bypass direction, and process display type for loop 1.
LOOP 2
Allows changing the same parameters for loop 2.
MODBUS ADDR
Gives the option to set the software module bus address. Factory
default is 2.
D.O. LOCKOUT
Allows individually locking or unlocking each digital output from faceplate control.
SECURITY
Allows changing the security passwords and the password level
required for several of the main menu options.
DIAGNOSTIC
Performs tests to verify the correct functionality of the unit’s hardware.
SETUP MENU OPTIONS SUMMARY
3-2
SETUP
OPTIONS
BRIGHTNESS
Executes a submenu which contains option board setup, faceplate
switch setup for both loop 1 and loop 2, auxiliary switch label settings,
ambient temperature entry, trend loop 1 and trend loop 2 screen
option, and serial port settings.
Allows changing the display to the desired brightness level.
ENTER SETUP
The controller setup is accomplished from the faceplate using the
setup menu. This procedure is for all users, i.e., for those selecting or
modifying a factory configuration, or developing a custom configuration.
Make certain that your selections provide a process condition that is
unlikely to cause injury or equipment damage if a problem occurs.
NOTES:
1. A continuous push of s or t
tion during procedural steps.
will accelerate the ramping func-
2. The following procedure is presented for single loop controllers.
Whenever loop 1, AO1, is referenced, repeat the procedure for
loop 2, AO2, if required.
3.
Setup procedures should be run with the unit off-line.
1. From the main menu, press
2. Press
L1: MAN
s
or
t
until SETUP is highlighted.
SEL .
L2: MAN
MAIN MENU
[SPLIT SCRN/FULL SCRN]
MONITOR
ALM SUM
BYPASS
TUNE
D.O. CTRL
AUX SWITCH
SETUP
CONFIGURE
1
ENTER SETUP
3-3
SETUP
PROCESS LOOP SETUP
Loop Tag Name
1. From the setup menu, press s or
SEL . The loop label menu will appear.
t
to highlight LOOP 1. Press
The loop tag name is a user-defined character string depicting the tag
name for the selected loop. The maximum number of characters
allowed is 14. Tag names less than 11 characters will appear on the
display in a larger font. Valid characters are A to Z, 0 to 9, - (hyphen),
*, (, ), /, ° and '.
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
SETUP
LOOP 1
LOOP 2
MODBUS ADDR
D.O. LOCKOUT
SECURITY
DIAGNOSTIC
OPTIONS
BRIGHTNESS
1
Tagname
2. If Tagname is not highlighted, press s or t until it is. Press SEL .
The cursor will appear on the left side of the screen and the soft key
menu will be displayed. Choose the characters for the description.
Press s or t until the character appears and then press the soft key
below ← or → to move the cursor to the next position. Once the tag
name characters have been entered, press SEL .
PV and Set Point
Engineering Units
The process variable and set point engineering units are user-defined
character strings depicting the name of the units of the values. The
maximum number of characters allowed is five. Valid characters are A
to Z, 0 to 9, - (hyphen), *, (, ), /, ° and '.
PV EU
SP EU
3. Press s or t until PV EU is highlighted. Press SEL . Select the
process variable engineering units. Press s or t until the character
appears and then press the soft key below ← or → to move the cursor to the next position. Once the engineering unit characters have
been entered, press SEL . Repeat this step to set the engineering
units for the set point (SP EU).
Decimal Places
This value controls the maximum number of digits after the decimal
point is displayed on process display screens. Setting this number to
four allows the value to be displayed with the most number of decimal
places. For example, if the process variable has a range of zero to
100, normal display would include a maximum of one decimal place.
Changing this number to zero limits the display to zero decimal
places. Selecting one or less decimal places causes the displayed
value to be shown in a larger font.
PROCESS LOOP SETUP
3-4
SETUP
NOTE: Maximum number of decimal places displayed on the trend
screen option is two.
DEC PLACES
4. To set the decimal places, press s or t until DEC PLACES is
highlighted. Press SEL . A selection box will appear. Press s or t
until the correct number of decimal places appears (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4),
then press SEL .
Output Bar Graph
High/Low Labels
The control output bar graph on the process display screen has multiple labels from which to choose. Valid choices are zero to 100, 100 to
zero, CLS to OPN, and OPN to CLS.
CO HI/LO TAG
5. Press s or t until CO HI/LO TAG is highlighted. Press SEL . A
selection box will appear. Select the bar graph control output tag (0/
100, 100/0, CLS/OPN or OPN/CLS) using s or t . Press SEL .
6. To continue, press the soft key below NEXT SCRN and the loop
options menu will appear.
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
SET - LOOP 1
Tagname:
xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
PV EU:
SP EU:
DEC PLACES:
CO HI/LO TAG:
ESC
XXXXX 3
XXXXX
4
5
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
0/100,100/0, CLS/OPN, OPN/CLS
YES
LOOP OPTIONS
Station Power Up
This specification is the initial mode of the control loop after start-up.
The station will be in bypass mode for the configurable start-up period
after power up/reset/switch-to-execute mode. After the start-up period
expires, the mode is as indicated by this specification unless overridden. When configuring a loop to last mode, the actual mode will be
the last mode prior to power up/reset/switch-to-execute until modified
by the operator or logic. When selecting local cascade/ratio, cascade
or ratio, control will be implemented depending upon the station type.
Valid selections are C-M, C-A, C-CR, manual, auto, cascade/ratio or
last.
LOOP OPTIONS
3-5
SETUP
PWR UP MODE
1. Press s or t until PWR UP MODE is highlighted. Press
SEL . Select the mode desired upon power up of the controller [C-M
(computer-manual), C-A (computer-auto), C-CR (computer-cascade/
ratio), MAN, AUT, C/R (cascade/ratio) and LAST]. Press s or t until
the desired mode is highlighted. Press SEL .
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
SET - LOOP 1
PWR UP MODE:
1
PWR UP [AO#1]:
2
FAIL [AO#1]:
3
AUD ALARM:
4
BYP ACTION:
5
C-M, C-A, C-CR, MAN, AUT, C/R, LAST
HIGH/LOW
HIGH/LOW/LAST
ON/OFF
DIR/REV
PREV
SCRN
PROC
DSPL
NEXT
SCRN
Analog Output
Power Up Level
This option determines what value the analog output is set to while
the unit is powering up. Valid selections are HIGH and LOW. The high
value is 5.25 VDC or 21 milliamps, while the low value is 0.75 VDC or
three milliamps. This value will remain in effect for the configurable
start-up period after power up. After the start-up period expires, the
output will be determined by the mode or operator setting.
PWR UP [AO#1]
2. Press s or t until PWR UP [AO#1] is highlighted. Press SEL .
A selection box appears. Press s or t to select HIGH (5.25 VDC/21
mA) or LOW (0.75 VDC/3 mA). Press SEL .
Analog Output Default
This option determines what value the analog output is set to when
the unit has failed. If a failure should occur, the controller will go into
bypass mode. Valid selections are HIGH, LOW and LAST. The high
value is 5.25 VDC or 21 milliamps, while the low value is 0.75 VDC or
three milliamps. Selecting LAST maintains the last valid analog output value until the unit is powered down/reset/switch-to-execute.
FAIL [AO#1]
3. Press s or t until FAIL [AO#1] is highlighted. Press SEL . A
selection box will appear. Press s or t to select HIGH, LOW or
LAST, then press SEL . For additional information, refer to Analog
Output Default Settings.
Audible Alarm
This option allows enabling or disabling the audible alarm located
inside the unit. The audible alarm will sound when there is an unacknowledged alarm associated with the loop.
NOTE: Disabling loop specific alarms also disables non-loop specific alarms.
LOOP OPTIONS
3-6
SETUP
AUD ALARM
4. Press s or t until AUD ALARM is highlighted. Press SEL . A
selection box will appear. Press s or t to select ON or OFF, then
press SEL .
Direct/Reverse Bypass
Operation
When the unit enters bypass mode, this option determines direction
of the control output action of the analog signal with respect to
changes in the control output percentage. Direct action is analogous
to fail close or air-to-open (ATO); reverse action is analogous to fail
open or air-to-close (ATC).
For example, if direct is chosen and the displayed output percentage
was 25%, 2 V (8 mA) will appear on the analog output and increasing
percent drives the output to 5 V (20 mA). If reverse is chosen with a
25% displayed output, 4 V (16 mA) will appear at the analog output,
and decreasing percent drives the output to 5 V (20 mA). This option
must be consistent with the configuration to support ATC/ATO final
control element in the main board. Refer to Reverse Acting Final
Control Elements in Section 4 for supporting logic.
BYP ACTION
5. Press s or t until BYP ACTION is highlighted. Press SEL . To
select the action when the controller is in bypass mode, press s or
t to select DIR or REV. Press SEL .
6. Press the soft key below NEXT SCRN to continue.
Process Display Type
7. The select Process Display Type screen will appear. This option
allows selecting the type of process display. There are four selections
as shown (Fig. 3-2). Press s or t to scroll the types. If the soft key
below VIEW is pressed, a view of that type process display screen
will appear. Once the selection has been made, press SEL to return
to the setup menu.
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
SET - LOOP 1
Process Display
Type: 1
7
2 BAR
ESC
PROC
DSPL
Choose 1 of 4 types:
1 = 2 bar
2 = 3 vertical bar
3 = 2 vertical bar (horizontal CO)
4 = 2 vertical bar (reverse SP and PV) with
horizontal CO
VIEW
LOOP OPTIONS
3-7
SETUP
TYPE 2
3 VERTICAL BAR
TYPE 1
2 BAR
219.0
PV
TRK
300
CF/HR
x1000
H
225
ALM
L
0
TRK
150
225
75
L2
150
0
INT
75
-75
L2
AUT
OPN
AUT
0
CLS
OPN
CF/HR
x1000
ALM
INT
300
150
75
219.0
PV
-150
PV
CLS
SP
FIC-200
FIC-200
TYPE 3
2 VERTICAL BAR
TYPE 4
2 VERTICAL BAR
(REVERSE)
219.0
PV
TRK
H
300
CF/HR
x1000
225
ALM
TRK
L2
75
PV
OPN
0
300
CF/HR
x1000
225
H ALM
150
150
L
219.0
PV
INT
SP
SP
CLS
FIC-200
L2
75
AUT
0
L
AUT
INT
PV
OPN
CLS
FIC-200
TP80481B
Figure 3-2. Process Display Selections
MODULE BUS ADDRESS
This option determines which software address is used to communicate to this device via the module bus (such as with a Type CTT Configuration and Tuning Terminal). The range of this value is zero
through 31. Addresses zero and one are typically reserved for loop
communication modules and should be used with caution.
NOTE: It is recommended that module bus address two be left
vacant so it can be used for installations when more than one Type
SLC controller will be on the same module bus.
MODBUS ADDR
MODULE BUS ADDRESS
3-8
1. From the setup menu, press s or t until MODBUS ADDR is
highlighted. Press SEL . Set the module bus address for the controller
by pressing s or t until the correct value appears.
SETUP
2. Press the soft key below ESC to leave this screen or below SAVE
to confirm the entry. Either soft key selection returns to the setup
menu.
NOTE: The module bus address default is two.
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
SETUP
Module Bus
Address
(0 - 31)
0
1
↑ - INCR ADDR
↓ - DECR ADDR
ESC
PROC
DSPL
SAVE
DIGITAL OUTPUTS LOCKOUT
The digital output lockout is a security function that prevents manual
changing of the digital outputs from the faceplate. The digital outputs
may also be locked out from the configuration. When viewing the digital output control screen, *LOCK is used to designate that the digital
output has been locked by this option, while LOCK designates that it
has been locked by the configuration.
D.O. LOCKOUT
1. From the setup menu, press s or t until D.O. LOCKOUT is
highlighted. Press SEL . Press s or t until DO#1 is highlighted.
Press SEL to toggle between LOCK and UNLOCK. Repeat this step
to set all the digital outputs. Press one of the soft keys and the soft
key menu will appear.
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
SETUP
DIG OUTPUT
FACEPLATE
LOCKOUT
DO#1
DO#2
DO#3
DO#4
1
[LOCK/UNLOCK]
[LOCK/UNLOCK]
[LOCK/UNLOCK]
[LOCK/UNLOCK]
SEL - TO CHANGE
ESC
PROC
DSPL
SAVE
DIGITAL OUTPUTS LOCKOUT
3-9
SETUP
2. Press the soft key below ESC to leave this screen or below
SAVE to confirm the entry. Either soft key selection returns to the
setup menu.
Refer to Digital Output Control for additional information.
SECURITY LEVELS
The security environment allows setting a password consisting of
three alphanumerics to two levels, technician and master. The master
password can be used to enter any of the environments, as it overrides the technician password. Security levels are intended to provide
a way to prevent unauthorized changes to the controller.
NOTES:
1. The security feature is optional and is not required for operation
of the unit.
2.
A master password is required to set or change security levels.
1. From the setup menu, press s or t until SECURITY is highlighted. Press SEL . The security password screen will appear. If it is
desired to set up a security function, determine a password for both
master and technician. MASTER should be highlighted. Press SEL
again. The soft key menu will appear and a cursor will appear on the
left side of the password to be entered.
2. Choose any ASCII character for the password. Maximum characters for the password are three. Press s or t until the character
appears and then press the soft key below ← or → to move the cursor to the next position. Once the master password characters have
been entered, press SEL and then s or t to highlight TECHNICIAN. When the passwords have been entered, press SEL .
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
SETUP
Enter New
Security
Passwords
SET
MENU
MASTER
AAA
1
TECHNICIAN
AAA
2
PROC
DSPL
SEC
LVL
3. Press any soft key. When the soft key menu appears, press the
soft key below SEC LVL. A Confirm Settings: screen will appear.
Press the soft key below YES to confirm or NO to not confirm.
SECURITY LEVELS
3 - 10
SETUP
4. Once the passwords are confirmed, the security level screen will
appear automatically. Security levels can only be entered for
BYPASS, TUNE, D.O. CTRL, AUX SWITCH, SETUP and CONFIGURE functions. With BYPASS highlighted, continue to press SEL to
enter the choice: T for technician, M for master and blank for none.
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
L1: MAN
SETUP
SETUP
Confirm Settings:
Enter New
Security
Levels
3
MASTER
AAA
BYPASS
TUNE
D.O. CTRL
AUX SWITCH
SETUP
CONFIGURE
TECHNICIAN
AAA
NO
L2: MAN
YES
SEC
PWD
PROC
DSPL
4
é
é
é
é
é
é
SET
MENU
5. To continue, press s or t to the next function. Press SEL until
the level is correct. Repeat this step to assign the security levels for
the rest of the functions. Once complete, press any soft key and the
soft key menu will appear. Press SET MENU and the Confirm Settings? screen will appear. Press the soft key below YES or NO.
Return to the setup menu and continue.
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
SETUP
Confirm
Settings?
BYPASS
TUNE
D.O. CTRL
AUX SWITCH
SETUP
CONFIGURE
NO
5
é
é
é
é
é
é
YES
SECURITY LEVELS
3 - 11
SETUP
DIAGNOSTICS
Refer to TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS in Section 6.
OPTIONS
Optional Temperature/
Frequency Input Board
1. To continue from the setup/options menu, press s or t until
OPTION BRD is highlighted. Press SEL (option board is installed at
the factory on Type SLC2 controllers). If no option board is installed, a
message appears:
OPTION BRD NOT INSTALLED
PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE
If an option board is installed, the option board screen will appear and
FREQUENCY is highlighted. Press SEL .
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
SETUP
OPTION BRD
FP SW LOOP 1
FP SW LOOP 2
AUX SW LBLS
AMBIENT TMP
TREND LOOP 1
TREND LOOP 2
SERIAL PORT
SET
MENU
FREQUENCY
1
PROC
DSPL
This option determines whether digital input three is to be used as a
frequency input. This feature is only available if the option board is
installed and the main board jumpers have been properly positioned.
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
L1: MAN
SETUP
FREQUENCY
SETUP AI3
SETUP AI4
CAL AI3
CAL AI4
L2: MAN
SETUP
2
3
4
5
6
USE DI3 AS
FREQUENCY
INPUT
FREQ: [YES/NO]
PREV
SCRN
DIAGNOSTICS
3 - 12
PROC
DSPL
ESC
2
SETUP
2. For controllers with the optional frequency input, press
SEL
when FREQUENCY is highlighted and the DI3 setup screen appears.
Press SEL and a NO/YES box will appear on the screen. Press s or
t to select. When the correct input is highlighted, press SEL to confirm the entry. Press the soft key below PREV SCRN to return to the
setup/option board menu.
SETUP AI3
This option allows defining analog input three as a temperature input.
An option board must be installed with the main board jumpers set in
order for a temperature input to be used (Fig. D-1). Function code
182 N output (mV) must be referenced to S3 of function code 230 at
block 100 (Fig. A-2).
3. For controllers with the optional temperature input that replaces
the standard AI3 input, press SEL when SETUP AI3 is highlighted.
An AI3 TEMP setup screen appears. Press SEL and a NO/YES box
will appear on the screen across from INP:. Press s or t to select
YES, then press SEL . Press s or t to select TYPE. Press SEL and
a box will appear with an input selection list. Press s or t to scroll
through the input list. When the correct input is highlighted, press
SEL .
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
Input Selection List
SETUP
AI3 TEMP
INP: [YES/NO]
TYPE: [MVOLT]
EU: [DEG C]
L/W RES (OHMS):
0.000
PREV
SCRN
3
UNDEFINED
MVOLT
S T/C
R T/C
E T/C
J T/C
K T/C
T T/C
CH E T/C
CH S T/C
2/100 LAB
2/100 IND
2/100 EUR
2/PURE NI
3/100 LAB
3/100 IND
3/100 EUR
3/PURE NI
PROC
DSPL
Set the engineering units (EU ) in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit. To
set the resistance (L/W RES [OHMS] ), press SEL . A new soft key
menu will appear and a cursor will be under the first zero to the right
of the decimal. Use the soft keys below ← and → to position the cursor and press s or t to establish the correct value. When complete,
press SEL . Press the soft key under PREV SCRN. A warning will
appear.
NOTES:
1. Whenever the ESC soft key menu option is shown, pressing the
soft key directly below it deletes the entered information for that
function and the correct information can be entered.
2. For controllers with optional temperature inputs, in addition to
completing Step 3, also complete a calibration procedure for temperature inputs. These screens are listed as CAL AI3 and CAL AI4.
OPTIONS
3 - 13
SETUP
WARNING
Unit will
be placed
in Bypass
to update
SETUP DATA
3
SAVE DATA?
NO
SETUP AI4
YES
This option allows defining analog input four as a temperature input.
An option board must be installed with the main board jumpers set in
order for a temperature input to be used and function code 182 N
(mV) output must be referenced to S4 of function code 230 at block
100 (Fig. A-2).
4. For controllers with two optional temperature inputs that replace
the standard AI3 and AI4 inputs, press SEL when SETUP AI4 is highlighted. Repeat Step 3 for the SETUP AI4 procedure.
Calibrate AI3/AI4
This option allows calibrating analog input three and/or analog input
four when being used as a temperature input.
NOTE: A 0 to 60 mV source, accurate to 0.01%, is required for calibration if mV or thermocouple was selected in setup. If RTD was
selected in setup, calibration requires a precision 300-ohm resistor
with 0.1% accuracy or better. The screens in the following CAL AI3
and CAL AI4 text are for millivolt or thermocouples. The values and
text on the screens will automatically change if RTD has been chosen. Refer to Figure 3-3 for calibration connections.
S1 LOCATED ON
TU BOARD
AI3
AI4
S1-8
S1-7
OPEN/OFF OPEN/OFF
+
TB1-8
TB1-11
–
TB1-9
TB1-12
+
TB1-8
TB1-11
–
TB1-9
TB1-12
TB4-3
TB4-4
CALIBRATE mV OR T/C
CALIBRATION
RESISTOR (300 Ω, 0.1%)
CALIBRATE RTD
RTD COMMON
TP80520A
Figure 3-3. AI3 and AI4 Calibration Connections
OPTIONS
3 - 14
SETUP
CAL AI3
5. From the options/setup menu, press s or t to highlight CAL
AI3. Press SEL . If AI3 has not been set as a temperature input from
the OPTION BRD screen, the message shown in the following screen
on the left will appear. Press any key to return to the options menu
and follow Step 3. If AI3 has been selected as a temperature input,
the following warning message and then a calibration screen will
appear. Connect an external 0 to 60 mV source that has an accuracy
of 0.01% and follow the instructions on the screen.
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
SETUP
WARNING
5
THIS AI
CHANNEL IS
NOT SET TO
A TEMP
INPUT
5
Unit will
be placed
in Bypass
to cal.
CONTINUE?
PRESS ANY KEY
TO CONTINUE
NO
YES
6. When the soft key below CAL is pressed, the controller will take a
reading of the 0 mV source. Once the reading is taken, the screen will
change to say connect 60 mV between AI3+ and AI3–. Press the soft
key below CAL. Once the reading is complete, the controller will
return to the options menu.
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
SETUP
Connect
0 mV
source
between
5 6
AI3+, AI3–
Press CAL
when ready
ESC
CAL AI4
PROC
DSPL
CAL
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for AI4 if required. After calibration is complete,
a short message will appear:
CHANNEL CAL. OK! PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE
The setup menu will appear. Press the soft key below PREV SCRN
and the main setup/options screen appears.
OPTIONS
3 - 15
SETUP
7. If channel calibration fails, a message appears:
CHANNEL CAL FAIL: PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE
Repeat Steps 5 and 6. If calibration fails again, check jumper settings
on the main and option boards.
User-Defined
Faceplate Switch
The faceplate can be used to tie a boolean value in the configuration
to a switch on the faceplate. This allows changing the state of the
switch from the process display screen as well as viewing the current
state.
NOTE: This switch is not available when a cascade or ratio configuration is used.
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
SET LOOP 1
Face Plate
Switch
Use: [YES/NO]
7
F1 Key
Label
On:
Off:
PREV
SCRN
FP SW LOOP 1
XXXX
XXXX
PROC
DSPL
8. To continue, press s or t to highlight FP SW LOOP 1. Press
SEL . This option allows making the left unmarked soft key (named
F1) a user-defined switch, and labeling the switch. Normally, the soft
key menu item in that position displays PREV SCRN. Selecting this
option disables the PREV SCRN function for this particular loop. With
the highlight on Use: press SEL and a YES/NO box will appear. By
selecting YES with s or t , this soft key menu display can be
changed to designate a switch. Two four-character tags can be designated to show the switch as being on or off. This option is available
for either loop 1 or loop 2 or both.
9. If this option is not desired, select NO by pressing
SEL and go to Step 11.
s
or
t
. Press
10. If this option is desired, select YES by pressing s or t . Press
SEL . Press s or t until ON: is highlighted. Press SEL . The cursor
and a soft key menu will appear. Press s or t to select the character. Use the soft keys below ← and → to move the cursor. Press
SEL .
OPTIONS
3 - 16
SETUP
11. Press s or t until OFF: is highlighted. Press SEL . The cursor
and a soft key menu will appear. Press s or t to select the character. Use the soft keys below ← and → to move the cursor. Press
SEL . Press any soft key. Press the soft key below PREV SCRN to
return to the setup menu.
NOTE: Whenever the ESC soft key menu option is shown, pressing
the soft key directly below it deletes the entered information for that
function, and the correct information can be entered.
Auxiliary Switch Labels
Four general purpose switches are available. Most frequent use of
these switches is to access digital outputs for alarms, etc. This selection allows defining a six-character label for the logic states of the
switch.
AUX SW LBLS
12. From the options menu, press s or t to highlight AUX SW
LBLS. Press SEL . Press s or t to highlight the switch. Press SEL .
Use the soft keys below ← and → to move the cursor. Press s or t
to select the characters. Changes to this switch state after setup is
complete are done from the main menu under AUX SWITCH. Refer
to Section 5 for additional information. Press SEL to confirm. Press
the soft key below PREV SCRN to continue and return to the options/
setup menu.
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
SETUP
SW
1(1)
1(0)
2(1)
2(0)
3(1)
3(0)
4(1)
4(0)
ESC
LABEL
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
←
12
→
Ambient Temperature
This option allows entering the ambient temperature at the terminals
to set the cold junction compensation conversion factor. This procedure is usually performed at the factory. It must be done in the field
when the following circumstances exist: the main board, termination
unit or cold junction compensator is replaced; a cold junction error
exists; or when an optional temperature input is used.
AMBIENT TMP
13. From the options menu, press s or t to highlight AMBIENT
TMP. Press SEL . Enter the ambient temperature at the wiring terminals by pressing s or t . Once the correct temperature is entered,
press the soft key below SAVE to confirm.
OPTIONS
3 - 17
SETUP
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
SETUP
Enter the
Ambient
Temperature
at Wiring
Terminals
XX.X
ESC
Trend Loop 1/Trend Loop
2
PROC
DSPL
13
C
SAVE
The trend screen option allows monitoring any combination of the
process variable, set point and control output over a tunable time
period. This feature is useful when fine tuning PID constants to monitor process responses to step changes. In these situations, the user
can define the trend to update as fast as twice per second or as slow
as once per hour. This provides a trend range of 24 seconds to 48
hours. The trend screen display area is 24 pixels wide by 82 pixels
high.
While at the trend screen, the control features are fully active. The
operator may change set point, control output or change control
modes with the auto/manual key. Note that the trend values are not
stored, so historical data is lost when departing the trend screen. The
screen provides numeric readout of all three values, as well as mode
and alarm indications. These trend screen features allow maintaining
complete process control while graphically viewing the dynamics of
the process over time.
TREND LOOP 1
TREND LOOP 2
14. From the setup/options menu, press s or t to highlight TREND
LOOP 1 or TREND LOOP 2. Press SEL . The SET LOOP screen
appears.
15. Press s or t to highlight the function. Press SEL . The ON/OFF
box appears. Press s or t to turn on or turn off the function. Press
SEL again and then t to move to the next function. When RATE is
highlighted, press SEL . A pull down menu will appear that lists the
trend time values available.
NOTE: Whenever the ESC soft key menu option is shown, pressing
the soft key directly below it deletes the entered information for that
function, and the correct information can be entered.
16. Press the soft key below PREV SCRN to return to the options/
setup menu.
OPTIONS
3 - 18
SETUP
L1: AUTO
L2: AUTO
Rate Pull-Down Menu
SET LOOP 1
14
TREND
PV
SP
CO
RATE
PREV
SCRN
Serial Interface
[ON/OFF]
[ON/OFF]
[ON/OFF]
[ON/OFF]
[0.5 S] (see menu)
PROC
DSPL
0.5 S
1.0 S
1.5 S
2.0 S
2.5 S
3.0 S
3.5 S
4.0 S
4.5 S
5S
6S
7S
8S
9S
10 S
↓
180 S
4M
5M
6M
7M
8M
↓
29 M
30 M
40 M
50 M
60 M
TRND
SCRN
The serial interface is designed to operate with eight-bit data at the
following baud rates and data framing characteristics.
•
Baud rates:
-
•
1200.
2400.
4800.
9600 (default).
19,200.
Data framing:
-
No parity, one stop bit (default).
Even parity, one stop bit.
Odd parity, two stop bits.
No parity, two stop bits.
Set the baud rate and data framing to match the values required by
the software being used.
1. From the setup/options menu, press
highlighted.
L1: MAN
s
or
t
until Serial Port is
L2: MAN
SETUP
OPTION BRD
FP SW LOOP 1
FP SW LOOP 2
AUX SW LBLS
AMBIENT TMP
TREND LOOP 1
TREND LOOP 2
SERIAL PORT
SET
MENU
1
PROC
DSPL
OPTIONS
3 - 19
SETUP
2. Press SEL . If the main board does not detect the presence of the
hardware required for the serial interface, the following message
appears:
PORT NOT AVAILABLE
PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE
If the serial interface hardware is present, the serial port screen
appears.
3. To set the baud rate, press
4. Press
5.
Press
SEL
s
s
or
t
until BAUD is highlighted.
and the baud rate list appears.
or
t
until the proper value appears and then press
SEL .
6. To set the data framing, press
lighted.
7. Press
8.
Press
SEL
s
or
s
until PARITY is high-
t
and the data framing list appears.
or
t
until the proper value appears and then press
SEL .
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS
The display brightness may be user-controlled by selecting this menu
option. There are 15 levels of screen brightness allowed. A lower setting will prolong the life of the display.
BRIGHTNESS
1. From the main setup menu, press
NESS. Press SEL .
s
or
t
to highlight BRIGHT-
2. Press s or t to select the desired contrast. Once adjustment is
complete, press the soft key below SAVE. The setup menu appears.
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS
3 - 20
SETUP
L1: MAN
L1: MAN
SETUP
LOOP 1
LOOP 2
MODBUS ADDR
D.O. LOCKOUT
SECURITY
DIAGNOSTIC
OPTIONS
BRIGHTNESS
MAIN
MENU
SETUP
¦
ADJUST
BRIGHTNESS
1
Ø
PROC
DSPL
ESC
PROC
DSPL
SAVE
ANALOG/DIGITAL OUTPUTS
WARNING
The analog and digital outputs change to a fixed value during
start-up, RESET and for various failure conditions. The analog
output values must be selected by the user to insure safe operation when transfer to default condition occurs.
AVERTISSEMENT
Les signaux de sortie analogiques et numériques prennent une
valeur fixe au moment du démarrage, d'une remise à l'état initial ou d'une panne. L'utilisateur doit affecter des valeurs
implicites qui assureront un fonctionnement sécuritaire.
This section contains information on setting the analog output default
settings to insure safe operation of the controller and the process. It
also includes information of how to issue digital output control from
the faceplate and use of operator alarms for noisy or remote locations.
Analog Output Default Settings
Both analog outputs go into bypass should a failure condition occur.
The Type SLC controller allows defining a set of default values for
both outputs should some type of failure occur with the main board.
This will occur under the following conditions:
•
If the RESET button is pressed.
•
If a fatal error occurs in the controller.
•
A process failure occurs for which a trip block (function code 32)
has been selected. This might be specified for critical inputs or
interlocks or violations of critical cross-limits.
ANALOG/DIGITAL OUTPUTS
3 - 21
SETUP
•
If the main board (CPU) enters into the error mode.
•
During certain diagnostic operations.
•
Communications with the main board lost.
These default settings should be set such that a safe operating state
is obtained if a controller fault occurs.
The default values for the analog outputs are selected from the faceplate at the setup menu loop option screen, FAIL AO#1. The selection
is HIGH (5.25 VDC, 105%), LOW (0.75 VDC, -5%), or LAST (for hold
last value).
Digital Output Control
Direct digital output control may be issued from the faceplate directly
(when in execute mode only) or from the configuration.
Access to changing the digital outputs from the faceplate may be
accepted or denied through the lock and unlock selections available
in security features or at the setup menu at the D.O. LOCKOUT
screen. Setting any digital output to the lock mode will disable faceplate control from the main menu D.O. CONTROL screen.
For those users with custom or modified factory configuration, direct
digital output control can be issued through the configuration procedures. Refer to D.O. LOCK in Section 4 for additional information.
Refer also to function code 231, S12 through S16 in the Function
Code Application Manual.
NOTE: On power down and main board reset, the digital outputs go
to zero until the controller returns to execute mode. Once the main
board goes into execute mode, the digital outputs go to the state
determined by the configuration, and the faceplate digital output
control mode will return to auto. On a main board failure condition,
digital outputs maintain the last known value.
Operator Alarms
In noisy environments or when operators may not be close by the
controller, it may be necessary to use one of the digital outputs to
control a signaling device to signal alarm conditions.
ANALOG/DIGITAL OUTPUTS
3 - 22
SECTION 4 - CONFIGURATION
INTRODUCTION
NOTE: Configuration personnel should have a solid background in
electronics instrumentation and process control and be familiar with
proper safety procedures for electronic instrumentation.
This section provides the required actions to establish and define the
Type SLC Strategic Loop Controller configuration. The section is
divided into two procedures: using a factory configuration and entering data via the faceplate; or using a factory configuration with modifications or developing a custom configuration using ABB tools such as
the handheld Type CTT Configuration and Tuning Terminal. For
developing a custom configuration or modifying the standard configuration, information is provided on block addresses, function codes
and specification lists and various configuration data.
Complete the procedures in Section 3 before entering a configuration.
Configuration worksheets are provided in Appendix C. It is recommended to fill in the worksheets prior to starting a configuration procedure. All the data will then be available to make the entries.
Common PID configurations that will cover most applications can be
directly entered from the controller faceplate (refer to FACTORY
CONFIGURATION).
If a complex or customized configuration is required for your application, refer to CUSTOM CONFIGURATION. To use a factory configuration as a base configuration but modify it for a particular application,
refer to MODIFYING A FACTORY CONFIGURATION. Either of these
choices requires the use of a Type CTT terminal or other ABB configuration tools.
SCREEN CONVENTIONS AND PUSHBUTTON FUNCTIONS
The screen displays illustrated in procedural steps throughout this
section contain circled numbers. Those numbers reference the step
number of the procedure and are not on the actual display.
Whenever there is more than one choice available on a screen display, the choices are bracketed [ ] on the screen illustration or are
located in the right margin.
The graphics of the screens presented are close representations, but
data may vary in size and position.
Pushbutton functions are shown in Figure 4-1.
INTRODUCTION
4-1
CONFIGURATION
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
CONFIGURE
PREDEFINED
TYPES
SINGLE PID
SINGLE PID EX
DUAL PID
DUAL PID EX
CASCADE
RATIO
UNMARKED
MULTI-FUNCTION
SOFT KEYS
SELECT
PUSHBUTTON
S
E
L
A
/
M
UP/DOWN
PUSHBUTTONS
AUTO/MANUAL
PUSHBUTTON
TP80433A
Figure 4-1. Configuration Menu
Single Function Pushbuttons
The three marked pushbuttons at the bottom of the faceplate are single function keys.
▲, t
Controls the cursor movement, changes selection choices on
screens, and increments or decrements selected parameter values
when changing a numeric variable.
A/M
Does not perform any action in the configure screens.
SEL
Allows selecting a highlighted parameter in a menu. On screens with
variables instead of menus, it will cause the unit to enter the change
mode on the variable highlighted to change its values.
Multi-Function Soft Keys
Three unmarked soft keys directly below the display are multi-function
keys. Their specific function is defined by the graphics and will vary
depending on the screen displayed. When no soft key menu is displayed directly above the soft keys, touching any of these soft keys will
display a soft key menu. Once this soft key menu is displayed, pressing the soft key below the menu item desired will initiate the defined
action.
SCREEN CONVENTIONS AND PUSHBUTTON FUNCTIONS
4-2
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION MENU OPTIONS SUMMARY
From the configuration menu, several control loop options are available (Fig. 4-1). Following is a brief description of each option:
SINGLE PID
SINGLE PID EX
Single analog input, single analog output, PID controller.
Two analog input, single analog output, PID controller.
DUAL PID
Two separate and independent single loop configurations. Each configuration is a single analog input, single analog output, PID controller.
DUAL PID EX
Two separate and independent single loop configurations. Each configuration is a two analog input, single analog output, PID controller.
CASCADE
RATIO
Two analog input, single analog output, two PID controller.
Two analog input, single analog output, PID controller.
FACTORY CONFIGURATION
Appendix A contains typical configuration diagrams for the six different standard factory configurations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Single loop PID internal set point.
Single loop PID external set point.
Dual loop PID internal set point.
Dual loop PID external set point.
Cascade.
Ratio.
These drawings will provide an insight as to how the six factory configurations are developed.
Entering a Factory Configuration
NOTE: It is not required to initialize before entering a configuration.
A series of user-friendly display screens prompt for specific parameters associated with the chosen configuration. The following procedure is based on entering a configuration in a new controller using a
single loop PID internal set point configuration.
1. From the main menu display, press ▲ or t until CONFIGURE is
highlighted. Press SEL . The security password screen will appear (if
security has been assigned during setup).
2. If security has been assigned, the security level (MASTER or
TECHNICIAN) will be shown in the box above Password. If necessary, enter the correct password. Remember that the master password will override the technician password. Using the soft key menu,
press the soft key below ← or → to move the character cursor left or
CONFIGURATION MENU OPTIONS SUMMARY
4-3
CONFIGURATION
right. To increment or decrement the password character to enter,
press ▲ or t accordingly. Once the correct password has been
entered, press SEL . Press the ESC soft key to return to the main
menu.
NOTE: To add a password if security has not been assigned, refer to
SECURITY LEVELS in Section 3. If no password is desired, the
default is AAA to continue.
L1: MAN
MAIN MENU
SPLIT SCRN
MONITOR
ALM SUM
BYPASS
TUNE
D.O. CTRL
AUX SWITCH
SETUP
CONFIGURE
Enter the
MASTER
Password
AAA
2
1
SEL - TO ENTER
ESC
←
→
3. Once the password is entered and approved, one of two screens
will appear. If the controller is not in bypass mode, a warning screen
will appear. If the controller is already in the bypass mode, the ADD/
MODIFY screen will appear.
WARNING
3
Place unit
INTO Bypass
or
Continue in
View Only
mode
MAIN
MENU
BYP
VIEW
ONLY
4. To start on the configuration process, the controller must be in the
bypass mode. Press the soft key below BYP to place the controller
into the bypass mode. To view the screens, press the soft key below
VIEW ONLY (to read only).
NOTE: In view mode, default values will appear for custom configurations.
FACTORY CONFIGURATION
4-4
CONFIGURATION
5. Once in bypass, the ADD/MODIFY or INITIALIZE screen will
appear. On new controllers, the box below Current Config: should say
CUSTOM.
6. To enter a new configuration, press ▲ or t to choose ADD/
MODIFY. Press SEL . The configuration type selection screen will
appear.
7. Press ▲ or t to highlight SINGLE PID, SING PID EX, DUAL
PID, DUAL PID EX, CASCADE or RATIO. Press SEL .
L1: BYP
L1: BYP
CONFIGURE
ADD/MODIFY
INITIALIZE
CONFIGURE
Predefined
Types
5 6
SINGLE PID
SING PID EX
DUAL PID
DUAL PID EX
CASCADE
RATIO
Current
Config:
CUSTOM
MAIN
MENU
PROC
DSPL
PREV
SCRN
7
PROC
DSPL
Control Loop Selection
1. Once the selection has been made, a control loop screen will
appear. The screen display is dependent on the selection made in
Step 7 of Entering a Factory Configuration.
L1: BYP
CFG: [SINGLE]
[LOOP 1]
SAVE
QUIT
1
LOOP 1
LOOP 1, LOOP 2
PRIMARY, SECONDARY
WILD VAR, CTRL LOOP
PREV
SCRN
PROC
DSPL
For SINGLE PID and SING PID EX: LOOP 1
For DUAL PID and DUAL PID EX: LOOP 1 and LOOP 2
For CASCADE: PRIMARY and SECONDARY
For RATIO: WILD VAR and CTRL LOOP
2. Press
or QUIT.
▲
or
t
to select the control loop. Press
SEL .
Select SAVE
FACTORY CONFIGURATION
4-5
CONFIGURATION
Analog Input Values
Refer to Table 4-1 for a functional description of the analog inputs for
each predefined configuration.
Table 4-1. Analog Input Functions
for Predefined Configurations
Predefined
Configuration Name
Loop
Analog Input
Meaning1
Single PID
Loop 1
AI1 = PV1
Single PID External SP
Loop 1
AI1 = PV1
AI2 = ESP1
Dual PID
Loop 1
AI1 = PV1
Loop 2
AI2 = PV2
Loop 1
AI1 = PV1
AI2 = ESP1
Loop 2
AI3 = PV2
AI4 = ESP2
Primary
AI1 = PV1
Secondary
AI2 = PV2
Wild
AI2 = WV1
Control
AI1 = CV1
Dual PID External SP
Cascade
Ratio
NOTE:
1. PV = process variable, ESP = external set point, WV = wild variable,
CV = control variable.
The analog input range and type are determined by the AI ZERO, AI
SPAN and SQUARE ROOT function.
AI ZERO
This zero value corresponds to a one-volt or four-milliamp input when
using the high level input type. With the selection of the millivolt input,
this value corresponds to a -20 millivolt input. The span value is equal
to the difference between the engineering units value at maximum
(five volts or 20 milliamps) and the zero value. The default value for AI
ZERO is 0.00, the range is -100,000.00 to +100,000.00 engineering
units (EU). Thermocouple and RTD inputs do not require the zero
specification.
1. The analog input screen will appear. To set AI ZERO, press ▲ or
t . When highlighted, press SEL . Use ▲ or t to enter the correct
value for AI ZERO. The default value is 0.00. The range is
-100,000.00 to +100,000.00 engineering units (EU). Press SEL .
FACTORY CONFIGURATION
4-6
CONFIGURATION
AI SPAN
The span value is equal to the difference between the engineering
units value at maximum (5 V or 20 mA) and the zero value. The
default value for AI SPAN is 100.00; the range is -100,000.00 to
+100,000.00 engineering units (EU). Thermocouple and RTD inputs
do not require the span specification.
NOTE: For proper controller operation, the AI span value entered
must be greater (more positive) than the AI zero value.
2. Press t to proceed to AI SPAN. Press SEL . Use ▲ or t to
enter the correct value for AI SPAN. The default value is 100.00. The
range is -100,000.00 to +100,000.00 engineering units (EU). Press
SEL .
NOTE: During the configuration procedures, ESC appears in the
soft key menu as the change mode is entered. Press ESC to reset
the value to the original or default value if an error has been made
and it needs to be entered again.
SQRT
3. Press t to proceed to SQRT (square root). Square root is used
to convert differential pressure into flow units. A square root of the
input before engineering units (EU) conversion is performed when
YES is selected. Press SEL . A NO/YES box will appear. Use ▲ or t
to select the choice, then press SEL .
L1: BYP
CFG: [SINGLE]
PREV
SCRN
AI ZERO (EU)
XXX.XX
1
AI SPAN (EU)
XXX.XX
2
SQRT: [NO]
3
PROC
DSPL
NEXT
SCRN
4. Press the soft key below NEXT SCRN to proceed.
PID Constants
CONV FACTOR
The conversion factor is also known as the gain multiplier K. The purpose of the conversion factor is to convert the difference signal from
engineering units (EU) to percent for use in the PID algorithm.
1. The PID screen will appear. If CONV FACTOR (conversion factor) is not highlighted, press ▲ or t until it is. Press SEL . Use ▲ or
t to enter the correct conversion factor value. The default value is
1.000. The range is 0.00 to +1,000.00. Press SEL .
FACTORY CONFIGURATION
4-7
CONFIGURATION
KP, KI and KD
These are terms used in the PID calculation. KP is proportional gain.
KI is integral, the number of resets per minute. KD is the derivative
rate action, used to reduce lag.
2. To enter the values for KP, KI and KD, follow the procedure listed
in Step 1.
The default values are:
KP = 1.00
KI = 0.00 resets/minute
KD = 0.00 minutes
The ranges are:
KP = 0.00 to +1,000.00
KI = 0.00 to +1,000.00 resets/minute
KD = 0.00 to +1,000.00 minutes
Once the last value is entered and
below NEXT SCRN to proceed.
SEL
is pressed, press the soft key
L1: BYP
CFG: [SINGLE]
CONV FACTOR
XXX.XX
2
X.XXX
XXX.XX
XXX.XX
3
KP:
KI:
KD:
PREV
SCRN
PROC
DSPL
NEXT
SCRN
Output Bar Graph High/Low Labels
HI CO LIM %
1. The control output screen will appear. If HI CO LIM % is not highlighted, press ▲ or t until it is. Press SEL . Use ▲ or t to enter the
correct value. The default value for HI CO LIM% is 105%; the range is
-5.0% to +105.0% in all factory configurations except in the primary
loop of the cascade factory configuration. The range then becomes
-100,000.00 to +100,000.00 engineering units (EU) in the primary
loop.
LO CO LIM %
2. Press SEL to confirm the selection. Repeat this step for LO CO
LIM %. The default value for LO CO LIM % is -5.0%; the range is
-5.0% to +105.0% in all factory configurations except in the primary
loop of the cascade factory configuration. The range then becomes
-100,000.00 to +100,000.00 engineering units (EU) in the primary
loop.
FACTORY CONFIGURATION
4-8
CONFIGURATION
ACTION
This is the direction switch. This input defines the direction the control
output must move to compensate for an error between the process
variable and the set point.
Direct - an increase in the control output results in a decrease in the
process variable.
Reverse - (default) an increase in the control output results in an
increase in the process variable.
3. Press t to proceed to ACTION. Press SEL . A DIR/REV box will
appear. Use ▲ or t to enter the choice, then press SEL .
4. Press the soft key below NEXT SCRN to proceed.
L1: BYP
CFG: [SINGLE]
HI CO LIM %
XXX.X
These first two items do not appear for cascade,
primary.
LO CO LIM %
XXX.XX
ACTION: [DIR/REV]
PREV
SCRN
PROC
DSPL
3
NEXT
SCRN
Process Variable and Set Point Values
These options set the signal zero, zero value of set point in engineering units, and signal span for both process variable and set point,
respectively.
PV ZERO
SP ZERO
PV SP SPAN
1. The process variable and set point screen will appear. If PV
ZERO is not highlighted, press ▲ or t until it is. Press SEL . Use ▲
or t to enter the correct value. The default value for PV ZERO and
SP ZERO is 0.0; the range is -100,000.00 to +100,000.00 engineering units (EU). The default value for PV SP SPAN is 100.0; the range
is -100,000.00 to +100,000.00 engineering units (EU). Press SEL .
Repeat this step for SP ZERO and PV SP SPAN.
NOTE: For proper controller operation, the PV span value entered
must be greater (more positive) than the PV zero value.
2. Press the soft key below NEXT SCRN to proceed.
FACTORY CONFIGURATION
4-9
CONFIGURATION
L1: BYP
CFG: [SINGLE]
PV ZERO (EU)
XXX.XX
1
SP ZERO (EU)
XXX.XX
PV SP SPAN
XXX.XX
PREV
SCRN
PROC
DSPL
NEXT
SCRN
PV Alarm Values
Alarms can be set to occur when the process variable changes above
the PV HI alarm value or below the PV LO alarm value.
NOTE: Set the alarm values to within the signal’s operating range to
enable the alarm function.
PV HI/LO ALM
1. The alarms screen will appear. If PV HI ALM is not highlighted,
press ▲ or t until it is. Press SEL . Use ▲ or t to enter the correct
value for the high alarm. The default value for PV HI ALM is +100,000
and for PV LO ALM is -100,000; the range is -100,000.00 to
+100,000.00 engineering units (EU). Press SEL . Repeat this step for
PV LO ALM.
2. Once the alarm values have been set, press the soft key below
NEXT SCRN to continue. The bad quality screen will appear.
L1: BYP
CFG: [SINGLE]
PV HI ALM
1
XXX.XX
PV LO ALM
XXX.XX
PREV
SCRN
PROC
DSPL
NEXT
SCRN
Manual Control Upon Bad Quality of the Analog Inputs/Outputs
A parameter termed quality is associated with all I/O points in the
Type SLC controllers. Good quality status is the normal operating values when all required communications have been established with
the I/O sources and the I/O is within allowed ranges. Bad quality
FACTORY CONFIGURATION
4 - 10
CONFIGURATION
results from an open circuit, or faulty operation of the input/output circuits.
Press SEL when the bad quality screen appears. A selection box will
appear. To select whether the controller should go to manual control
when bad quality analog inputs/outputs are detected, use ▲ or t to
choose YES or NO. Once the selection has been made, press SEL .
Press the soft key below CFG MENU to return to the save/quit menu.
L1: BYP
CFG: [SINGLE]
Go To
Manual Ctrl
Upon
Bad Quality
on AI/AO?
[NO/YES]
PREV
SCRN
PROC
DSPL
CFG
MENU
Save or Abort Configuration
1. To save the configuration, press ▲ or t to highlight SAVE.
Press SEL . The following save screen will appear. Press the soft key
below YES to save the configuration. A message will appear that the
configuration has been saved. To not save the configuration, press
the soft key below NO. The save/quit (previous) screen will appear.
2. To stop the configuration process, press ▲ or t to highlight QUIT,
then press SEL . The abort configuration screen will appear. To abort
the configuration, press the soft key below YES; the main menu will
appear. To not abort the configuration, press the soft key below NO; the
configure menu will appear.
L1: BYP
CFG: [SINGLE]
Existing
Config will
be LOST!
[LOOP 1]
SAVE
QUIT
PREV
SCRN
1
2
PROC
DSPL
CFG
MENU
Save NEW
Config?
NO
1
YES
FACTORY CONFIGURATION
4 - 11
CONFIGURATION
Abort
Config
Operation?
YES
2
NO
CUSTOM CONFIGURATION
It is recommended that the procedures in Section 3 be completed
before starting.
NOTE: To start fresh, initialize the controller (Fig. A-12).
Configuration of custom control strategies can be accomplished by a
number of devices. The Type CTT Configuration and Tuning Terminal
operates through a connector on the faceplate of the Type SLC controller and is used to design, modify, tune, simulate, troubleshoot and
document a given control strategy. Refer to Table 1-2 for the Type
CTT instruction number.
Other configuration software tools operate via a PC over the module
bus, assigning function codes to function blocks. The first of these,
LAN-90, contains configuration loading system (CLS), which is used
to configure the Type SLC controller. LAN-90 Process Control View
software revision 4.3 or later is the minimum requirement for 100 percent compatibility with the Type SLC controller. The CLS system can
download a configuration to a printer for hard copy documentation.
Another ABB software tool, CAD/TXT (Computer Aided Drawing/
Text), contains two configuration programs. CAD/TXT software revision 5.2.2 or later is the minimum requirement for compatibility with
the Type SLC controller. Software revision 5.3 is recommended for
100 percent functionality. CAD/TXT contains TXT, a DOS-based software tool used to configure the controller much like the Type CTT
terminal does. CAD/TXT also contains CADEWS, a CAD-based system used to design, modify, tune, trend, simulate, troubleshoot and
document a given control strategy. Once a control strategy is configured, it can be directly downloaded to the controller or sent to a plotter or printer. Once a CADEWS configuration is compiled, it is
downloaded to the controller over the Plant Loop or over the module
bus, provided that the controller is in the configure mode. Refer to
Table 1-2 for instruction numbers of software tools.
CUSTOM CONFIGURATION
4 - 12
CONFIGURATION
When downloading a custom configuration from a Type CTT Configuration and Tuning Terminal or other device over the module bus, the
controller display should be on the main menu or on a process display. Downloading a custom configuration will overwrite any existing
configuration; therefore, some setup parameters are redefined. Once
the configuration is downloaded, the setup menu should be accessed
to verify or modify loop-specific and option card information.
NOTES:
1. The SETUP-OPTIONS-OPTION BRD menu will reflect the
existence of the option board and specifications set by a custom
configuration.
2. If the faceplate switch is used, the SETUP-OPTIONS-FP SW
LOOP # must be configured to use the faceplate switch. The
loop-specific faceplate switch is overridden if a cascade or ratio station is detected for that loop.
Custom control configuration is accomplished by assigning function
codes to function blocks. The function codes are operations such as
PID control, sum, limit, square root, etc. The function blocks are
addressable memory locations saved in the NVRAM and copied to
RAM for execution. The operator interface board communicates with
the main board and displays information such as process variable,
set point and control output.
To configure a function block, define the following parameters:
•
•
•
Block address.
Function code.
Specification list.
The selected software tool allows entering and defining these parameters. Function blocks can be added, modified or deleted. The controller stores the configuration in the NVRAM.
The Type SLC controller can operate in configure, execute and error
modes. The controller must be in the configure mode to add, modify
or delete a function. When the controller is in the execute mode, all
configured functions will be executed. Certain parameters, labeled
tunable in the function code specifications tables, can be altered
while the controller is in the execute mode.
Block Address
The block address (or block number) is a reference number for a
function block and is assigned during configuration. The output values from a function block may be referenced as inputs to other function blocks by using the block address. For functions that have more
than one output, each one is referenced by a sequential block
address starting with the block address assigned during configuration. Note that these consecutive block addresses must not be
assigned to other function blocks in the controller.
CUSTOM CONFIGURATION
4 - 13
CONFIGURATION
The Type SLC controller is designed to process the function blocks in
ascending numerical order beginning with the lowest numbered one.
For this reason, the lowest block addresses should be assigned to the
function blocks closest to the inputs. This must be done to minimize
loopbacks. A loopback occurs when the output of a higher numbered block is used as an input to a lower numbered block. This situation requires the controller to process all of the function blocks (a
cycle) more than once before the correct inputs and outputs can be
obtained from blocks that have loopbacks.
NOTE: Function code 82, S15, autosequencing, can be used to
minimize the effects of loopbacks.
Function Codes
Table 4-2 lists function codes that support the Type SLC controller.
The Function Code Application Manual provides the specification
lists, block output definitions, and a detailed explanation of the operation of each function code. The function code manual should be used
in conjunction with this instruction when designing a customized configuration.
Table 4-2. Control Functions
Function
Block Type
Station
Control
function
Batch function
Advanced
functions
No.
Description
80
Control station (MFC)1
231
SLC station1,2
4
Pulse positioner
24
Adapt
Function
Block Type
Advanced
functions
(continued)
No.
Description
166
Integrator
167
Polynomial
168
Interpolator
169
Matrix addition
156
Advanced PID
170
Matrix multiplication
160
Inferential smith
171
Trigonometric
123
Device driver
172
Exponential
161
Sequence generator
173
Power
140
Restore
152
Model parameter estimator
153
174
Logarithm
1
Function generator
ISC parameter converter
2
Manual set constant
154
Adaptive parameter scheduler
3
Lead/lag
162
Digital segment buffer
5
Pulse rate
163
Analog segment buffer
6
High/low limiter
165
Moving average
7
Square root
CUSTOM CONFIGURATION
4 - 14
Computing
CONFIGURATION
Table 4-2. Control Functions (continued)
Function
Block Type
Computing
(continued)
Signal select
Signal status
Logic
No.
8
14
Description
Function
Block Type
No.
Description
Rate limiter
Logic
110
5-input rung
4-input summer
(continued)
111
10-input rung
112
20-input rung
96
Redundant analog input
15
2-input summer
16
Multiply
17
Divide
97
Redundant digital input
51
Manual set constant
102
Pulse input/period3
52
Manual set integer
103
Pulse input/frequency4
58
Time delay (analog)
104
Pulse input/totalization5
65
Digital sum with gain (4-input)
182
Analog input definition6
9
Analog transfer
230
SLC input/output1,2
10
High select
11
Low select
13
Integer transfer
59
12
I/O field
Controlway/
module bus
I/O
25
Analog input (same PCU)
28
Analog output (same PCU)
41
Digital input/controlway/
module bus
Digital transfer
63
Analog input list (same PCU)
High/low compare
64
Digital input list (same PCU)
31
Test quality
95
Module status monitor
69
Test alarm
26
Analog input/loop
Plant Loop
I/O
33
NOT
30
Analog exception report
34
Memory
42
Digital input/loop
35
Timer
45
Digital exception report
36
Qualified OR (8-input)
66
Analog trend
37
AND (2-input)
Remote control memory
AND (4-input)
Exception
report
62
38
68
Remote manual set constant
39
OR (2-input)
Executive
81
Executive2
40
OR (4-input)
82
Segment control2
50
Manual set switch
89
Last block2
61
Blink
90
Extended executive2
85
Up/down counter
Trip
32
Trip
86
Elapsed timer
ASCII
113
ASCII string descriptor7
101
Exclusive OR
NOTES:
1. May not be restored properly using function code 140.
2. Only one permitted per controller in fixed block addresses.
3. S1, S2 and S4 of function code 102 are not used in the Type SLC controller and should be left at default values. The user range is preset
at 0.001 to 50 secs.
4. S1, S2 and S4 of function code 103 are not used in the Type SLC controller and should be left at default values. The user range is preset
at 0.1 to 50,000 Hz.
5. S1 and S2 of function code 104 are not used in the Type SLC controller and should be left at default values.
6. S3, S7, S8, S10 and S13 of function code 182 are not used in the Type SLC controller and should be left at default values.
7. Refer to the Function Code Application Manual, function code 231, for additional information to be used with function code 113.
CUSTOM CONFIGURATION
4 - 15
CONFIGURATION
Specification List
The specification list for each function code includes the inputs and
parameters needed to implement the function. The specifications
that are needed depend on the requirements of the particular function. Each function code has a list of initial (or default) values when it
is first selected. These values may be changed as needed for the
particular application. Any specification not modified will remain at its
initial (default) value.
Each specification in the function code is identified as being tunable
or nontunable. A tunable specification may be changed either when
the controller is being configured or while it is in the execute mode.
The tunable adjustment can be made using the TUNE function of the
Type CTT terminal. A specification identified as nontunable can only
be changed when the controller is in the configure mode.
Refer to the Function Code Application Manual for a listing of function codes and specifications.
Function Blocks
The Type SLC controller has two types of function blocks: fixed and
user-defined.
FIXED BLOCKS
The fixed blocks consist of executive blocks, extended executive
blocks, segment control blocks, SLC I/O blocks, SLC station blocks
and ASCII string descriptor blocks.
The Type SLC controller uses the executive block (function code 81),
the segment control block (function code 82), and the extended executive block (function code 90) to set up overall controller operations.
In addition to the fixed SLC I/O block (function code 230), the controller also has three built-in ASCII string descriptor blocks (function code
113), one SLC station (function code 231), and four analog input definition blocks (function code 182).
These blocks have fixed addresses (i.e., an address cannot be
assigned to them). Table 4-3 is a summary of fixed block locations.
USER-DEFINED BLOCKS
Blocks 30 to 49, 58 to 99, 117 to 899 and 914 to 1019 are user-definable. The user-defined blocks are not pre-assigned and function
codes can be added to perform a wide variety of functions to implement control logic. The total number of blocks that can be defined
within this range is dependent on the function codes required. Table
4-3 lists user-defined block locations.
CUSTOM CONFIGURATION
4 - 16
CONFIGURATION
Table 4-3. Fixed and User-Defined Block Address Summary
Block Address
Description
Function Code
0 - 14
Executive block
811
15 - 19
Segment control block
821
20 - 29
Extended executive block
901
30 - 49
—
User configurable
50 - 57
Analog input definition
182
58 - 99
—
User configurable
SLC I/O
2301
100 - 116
117 - 899
—
User configurable
900 - 913
SLC station
2311
914 - 1019
—
User configurable
1020 -1022
ASCII string descriptor
113
Last block
891
1023
NOTE:
1. Only one permitted per controller.
CONFIGURATION UTILIZATION FACTORS
Each function code has a utilization factor associated with it. The factor represents the amount of memory occupied by the function. When
planning control strategy, it is important to note the utilization factor
associated with the functions used, so as not to exceed 100 percent.
This tends not to be a concern except when very large control
sequences are used.
Refer to Appendix C of the Function Code Application Manual for a
complete listing of function code execution times. These times will
help keep the configuration within the range of the Type SLC controller capacity.
CONFIGURATION DATA REQUIRED
The custom configuration worksheets in Appendix C are provided to
prompt the user for the basic information needed to generate the configuration. The worksheets also help organize the data in a usable format prior to entering the configuration with the selected configuration
software tool.
Station Functions
Three types of station functions are available: basic, cascade or ratio.
The principal difference between the three station functions is the
method in which the set point is generated. Refer to the Function
Code Application Manual.
NOTE: The station functions linked to the Type SLC controller faceplate must be configured as a passive station with station address
equal to 254 (S16 of function code 80).
CONFIGURATION UTILIZATION FACTORS
4 - 17
CONFIGURATION
BASIC STATION
A basic station generates a set point (SP) and provides manual/automatic transfers, control output adjustment in manual control mode,
and set point adjustments in automatic control mode.
CASCADE STATION
A cascade station provides the same functions as a basic station plus
an additional mode that allows the set point to be controlled by an
external process variable while in the cascade mode.
RATIO STATION
An analog control station configuration that maintains a ratio between
two variables. A wild variable multiplied by a ratio adjustment factor
(ratio index) determines the set point output. The initial ratio index
value is calculated by the station to maintain the current set point output value when the station is placed into the ratio mode.
The initial ratio index value is determined internally when the station
mode is transferred to ratio mode. Valid ratio index values range from
0.01 to 10.0.
Dual Loop Operation
The faceplate of the Type SLC controller can display the data associated with two different M/A stations within the configuration. Both loops
can be displayed on the faceplate at the same time by selecting the
split screen display from the main menu.
When developing the configuration, note the following.
Loop 1
1. Specification S16 within function code 80 defines the M/A station
as a passive station when set to an address of 254.
2. Specification S23 within function code 80 defines the M/A station
as a basic control station when set to station type 0.
3. Specification S1 (strategic loop controller station, function code
231, fixed block address 900) must be the block address of the M/A
station (function code 80) control output associated with loop 1. It
allows the SLC station block to get loop information from the M/A station, and it enables the M/A station faceplate to be placed in automatic or manual control mode.
4. Specification S5 of function code 230 (strategic loop controller I/
O, fixed block address 100) is analog output one (AO1), and must
therefore be associated with the M/A station for loop 1. Manual control of this output is maintained when the unit enters bypass mode.
CONFIGURATION DATA REQUIRED
4 - 18
CONFIGURATION
Loop 2
1. Specification S16 within function code 80 defines the M/A station
as a passive station when set to an address of 254.
2. Specification S23 within function code 80 defines the M/A station
as a basic control station when set to station type 0.
3. Specification S2 (strategic loop controller station, function code
231, fixed block address 900) must be the block address of the M/A
station (function code 80) control output associated with loop 2. It
allows the SLC station block to get loop information from the M/A station, and it enables the M/A station faceplate to be placed in automatic or manual control mode.
4. Specification S6 of function code 230 (strategic loop controller I/
O, fixed block address 100) is analog output 2 (AO2), and must therefore be associated with the M/A station for loop 2. Manual control of
this output is maintained when the unit enters bypass mode.
Both Loops
On power up, initialization, or return from bypass, loop 1 is the default
loop that is displayed on the faceplate. Loop 2 cannot be activated
unless:
1. It is configured properly (function code 231, S1 = block address of
function code 80, loop 1; S2 = block address of function code 80, loop
2).
and
2. The CHNG LOOP soft function key is pressed.
Cascade Operation
The dual loop capability can also be used to display a single output
cascade loop configuration by following these guidelines.
Loop 1 is the primary loop and has no control output. Its PID output is
the external set point to loop 2. The primary loop is also known as the
master or outer loop. There is no control output associated with this
loop.
1. Specification S16 within function code 80 defines the M/A station
as a passive station when set to an address of 254.
2. Specification S23 within function code 80 defines the M/A station
as a basic control station when set to an address of zero.
3. Specification S1 (strategic loop controller station, function code
231, fixed block address 900) is the block address of the M/A station
(function code 80) control output associated with loop 1. It allows the
SLC station block to get loop information from the M/A station, and it
enables the M/A station faceplate to be placed in automatic or manual
control mode.
CONFIGURATION DATA REQUIRED
4 - 19
CONFIGURATION
4. There is no control output associated with the primary loop, therefore S5 of function code 230 (strategic loop controller I/O, fixed block
address 100) is left at a default address of 2.
Loop 2 is the cascade loop, and has a control output associated with
AO2. In manual or automatic control modes, the set point is derived
from the faceplate. In cascade control mode, the set point originates
from the primary control loop. Loop 2 is also known as the cascade,
secondary or inner loop.
1. Specification S16 within function code 80 defines the M/A station
as a passive station when set to an address of 254.
2. Specification S23 within function code 80 defines the M/A station
as a cascade control station when set to station type 4.
3. Specification S2 within function code 80 is the set point originating from the primary control loop. This set point is output from the M/A
station when cascade control is selected from the faceplate.
4. Specification S2 (strategic loop controller station, function code
231, fixed block address 900) is the block address of the M/A station
(function code 80) control output associated with the cascade loop. It
allows the SLC station block to get loop information from the M/A station, and it enables the M/A station faceplate to be placed in manual,
automatic or cascade control mode.
5. Specification S6 of function code 230 (strategic loop controller I/
O, fixed block address 100) is analog output 2 (AO2); therefore it
must be associated with the M/A station for loop 2. Manual control of
this output is maintained when the unit enters bypass mode.
The cascade station uses an external set point. Normally the engineering units for the external set point would be set the same as the
set point engineering units defined for the cascade loop. If special tag
or engineering units for the external set point are desired, they can be
defined by the SETUP - LOOP 1 menu option.
Configuration Lock
The configuration lock is a security feature that prevents unauthorized
altering of the configuration by not allowing transfer of the SLC controller from the execute mode to the configure mode.
Specification S1 of function code 90 (extended executive block) controls this function. Setting S1 to block one permanently locks the configuration; the default is S1 to zero (configure mode allowed).
NOTES:
1. Once locked permanently, to gain access to logic in this segment it is necessary to initialize NVRAM under the INITIALIZE
option at the configure menu.
CONFIGURATION DATA REQUIRED
4 - 20
CONFIGURATION
2. An engineering lock action may be implemented by using a tunable block as the input to S1. The configuration could then be
unlocked by authorized persons through tuning the appropriate
block. In critical or hazardous applications, it may be safer to use
logic that defines safe periods (i.e., normal shutdown periods) to
unlock the configuration.
3.
This feature overrides the SECURITY option in the setup menu.
Tune/Modify Lock
The configuration TUNE/MODIFY lock is a security feature that prevents unauthorized altering of the configuration in the current segment. The tune lock insures that tunable parameters in a critical
segment cannot be changed while the controller is on-line to the process. The modify lock prohibits modifying or deleting blocks within the
segment.
NOTES:
1. To gain access to logic under modify/lock, it is necessary to initialize NVRAM under the INITIALIZE option at the configure menu.
2.
This feature overrides the SECURITY option in the setup menu.
Specification S1 of function code 82 (segment control block), in the
tens digit, controls this function. Setting:
S1 = 01, 02
S1 = 11, 12
S1 = 21, 22
S1 = 31, 32
–
–
–
–
tune and modify allowed.
tuning not allowed.
modify lock.
tune and modify lock.
EXECUTION CYCLE TIME S1, S2 FUNCTION CODE 82 BLOCK 15
Specification S1 of function code 82 (segment control block), in the
ones digit, determines the base execution time units. Setting:
S1 = 01, 11, 21, 31 = seconds.
S1 = 02, 12, 22, 32 = minutes.
Specification S2 determines the execution cycle time in time units
selected with S1.
START-UP TIME S4 FUNCTION CODE 90 BLOCK 20
Specification S4 (tunable) of function code 90 is the controller start-up
time in seconds. Whenever power is cycled or the unit is placed in
execute mode, fixed block ten in the module has an output of logic
one for the length of time specified by S4. This shows that the start-up
has been initiated and is proceeding correctly.
CONFIGURATION DATA REQUIRED
4 - 21
CONFIGURATION
D.O. LOCK
Function code 231, S12 through S16, provides the configuration for
digital outputs. Each of these specifications represents the configuration control mode (lock or unlock) of the corresponding digital output.
Refer to Table 4-4 and function code 231 for additional information.
Table 4-4. Digital Output State
Main Menu
D.O. Control
Configuration1
Faceplate
Main Menu
D.O. Control Mode
Setup Menu
D.O. Lockout
Configuration
BLK 900 FC 231
S12-S16
*Lock2
Locked
0 or 1
Lock
Unlocked
0
AUT
Unlocked
1
MAN
Unlocked
1
NOTES:
1. OIS remote control is available with the use of function code 123. Refer to the Function Code
Application Manual for operation.
2. Refer to D.O. CONTROL in Section 5.
Trip Blocks/Test Quality Blocks
Incorporating trip blocks and test quality blocks provide safety related
procedures during loss of the input. The following information provides the data necessary to include these trip and quality test blocks
in the system.
GOOD/BAD SIGNAL QUALITY STATUS
A parameter termed quality is associated with all I/O points in the
Type SLC controllers.
Good quality status is the normal operating value when all required
communications have been established with the I/O sources and the
I/O is within allowed ranges.
Bad quality status results from an out-of-range signal, or a signal not
getting through from the module bus or Plant Loop. The normal operation of the controllers is to mark bad inputs as bad quality and then
use the last good value of the input for further control. This assumes
that suitable control can be maintained without the input and that the
input problem will be corrected in a timely manner. However, a safety
related input should be alarmed so that operators can take immediate
action to correct the problem. Personnel injury or severe equipment
damage may occur if a trip or interlock does not function properly
because of the loss of the input. In these cases, loss of the input
should cause the controller to go to a safe default condition. To internally alarm for a broken analog input, the analog input status from
function code 182 is brought in as either S3, S4, S5 or S6 of function
code 231. This displays general purpose alarms of bad quality inputs
on the faceplate (Fig. 4-2).
D.O. LOCK
4 - 22
CONFIGURATION
A test quality block (function code 31) can be configured to transfer
the associated operator manual/auto station to manual, shut down
the process or send a warning to an annunciator (Fig. 4-2).
NOTE: Configuration of a test quality block requires the use of a
Type CTT Configuration and Tuning Terminal or other software configuration tool.
Only process I/O, module bus inputs, and Plant Loop inputs can be
tested for quality. Quality is not propagated through the controller
function blocks. All internal points will have good quality.
ANALOG OUTPUT QUALITY
A broken analog output current loop may or may not cause the controller to go into the bypass operation depending on how it is configured. A test quality block (function code 31) can monitor analog
output quality. When the current loop is broken, a bad quality is registered (Fig. 4-3).
Specification S18 within function code 80 is the transfer to manual
mode input. If S18 is set to the block address of the test quality block
associated with the analog output, the controller will transfer into
manual control mode.
Depending on the application, it may be desirable to configure a trip
block (function code 32), which would place the controller into bypass
mode (registers as ERROR mode on the Type CTT terminal) if a
break in the analog output current loop is detected (Fig. 4-3). If, and
only if, a trip block is activated, will the controller go into bypass operation when the analog output current is broken. Specification S1 of
the trip block is the block address of the test quality block associated
with the analog output. Note that all configured control loops are
placed in bypass mode when a trip is activated.
D.O. LOCK
4 - 23
CONFIGURATION
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
SLC I/O
mV
(182)
50
ST
51
RCJ
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
(182)
52
ST
53
RCJ
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S13
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
AI 3
AI 3
AI 4
AI 4
AO 1
AO 1
AO 2
AO 2
DO 1
DI 1
DO 2
DI 2
DO 3
DI 3
DO 4
DO 1
PI 1
DO 2
SPARE DO 3
(182)
DO 4
54
55
PI
STAT
N/A
N/A
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(230)
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
S1
S2
S3
S4
TSTQ
(31)
N
TEST QUALITY BLOCK
CHECKS IF PROPER
VALUES OBTAINED ON
ANALOG INPUTS. IF NOT,
ENABLES TRIP BLOCK.
S1
TRIP
(32)
N
CAUSES UNIT TO GO INTO
ERROR MODE WHICH
FORCES OUTPUTS TO
THEIR PRESET DEFAULT
VALUES.
(182)
56
57
M/A
MFC/P
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
PV
SP
SP
O
A
A
TR
C/R
TS
C
MI
C-F
AX
(80)
N+1
N
N+2
N+4
N+3
N+5
(25)
N
C/R
A
(2)
N
TSTQ
(31)
N
LX
S1
S2
S3
T
(9)
N
CX
HAA
S1
S2
S3
S4
LAA
HDA
LDA
AO
TRS2
TRPV
T
GENERAL PURPOSE ALARMS
FROM ANALOG INPUT
ALARM STATUS
M/A
MFC/P
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
AI/B
PV
SP
SP
O
A
A
TR
C/R
TS
C
MI
C-F
AX
C/R
LX
CX
(80)
N+1
N
N+2
N+4
N+3
N+5
M/A SLC
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
(231)
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
GPA 1
SL1
GPA 2
SL2
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
ALM 1 A/M 1
ALM 2 A/M 2
ASCII
A/M 3
OP 1
A/M 4
OP 2
N/A
OP 3
N/A
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
OP 4
HAA
LAA
HDA
LDA
AO
TRS2
TRPV
T
TP80441A
Figure 4-2. Test Quality/Trip Block Configuration
D.O. LOCK
4 - 24
CONFIGURATION
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
SLC I/O
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
50
51
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
(182)
52
ST
53
RCJ
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S13
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
AI 3
AI 3
AI 4
AI 4
AO 1
AO 1
AO 2
AO 2
DO 1
DI 1
DO 2
DI 2
DO 3
DI 3
DO 4
DO 1
PI 1
DO 2
SPARE DO 3
(182)
DO 4
54
55
PI
STAT
N/A
N/A
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(230)
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
S1
S2
S3
S4
TSTQ
(31)
N
TEST QUALITY BLOCK
CHECKS IF PROPER
VALUES OBTAINED ON
ANALOG INPUTS. IF NOT,
ENABLES TRIP BLOCK.
S1
TRIP
(32)
N
CAUSES UNIT TO GO INTO
ERROR MODE WHICH
FORCES OUTPUTS TO
THEIR PRESET DEFAULT
VALUES.
(182)
56
57
M/A
MFC/P
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
PV
SP
SP
O
A
A
TR
C/R
TS
C
MI
C-F
AX
(80)
N+1
N
N+2
N+4
N+3
N+5
C/R
LX
CX
HAA
LAA
HDA
LDA
AO
TRS2
TRPV
T
M/A
MFC/P
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
M/A SLC
PV
SP
SP
O
A
A
TR
C/R
TS
C
MI
C-F
AX
C/R
LX
CX
HAA
LAA
HDA
LDA
AO
(80)
N+1
N
N+2
N+4
N+3
N+5
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
(231)
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
GPA 1
SL1
GPA 2
SL2
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
ALM 1 A/M 1
ALM 2 A/M 2
ASCII
A/M 3
OP 1
A/M 4
OP 2
N/A
OP 3
N/A
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
OP 4
TRS2
TRPV
T
TP80442A
Figure 4-3. Analog Output Quality
D.O. LOCK
4 - 25
CONFIGURATION
Reverse Acting Final Control Elements
When a reverse acting final control element (air-to-close (ATC)) is in
use, the control output of the Type SLC controller must be inverted.
Two operating modes will be affected: bypass mode and execute
mode. In bypass mode, the operator interface board controls each
analog output in the manner described in Direct/Reverse Bypass
Operation in Section 3.
To make the selection, use the SETUP-LOOP#-BYPASS DIRECTION
menu. In execute mode, the main board (with the configuration) executes function codes and controls the outputs. Each ATC final control
element (reverse acting output) must be configured to add a two-input
summer (function code 15) between the M/A station output (function
code 80) and the corresponding analog output of function code 230
(strategic loop controller I/O, fixed block address 100). Refer to
Figure 4-4.
Entering Data
Entering data into the controller requires the Type CTT Configuration
and Tuning Terminal. Refer to the handheld terminal instruction for
detailed procedures on entering the information.
1. Enter the Type SLC controller module address.
2. Place the controller in bypass.
3. Place the target unit in the configure mode.
4. Determine the block address at which to place the function code.
5. Add the block.
6. Select required function code.
7. Set the specifications to the required values, linking them to other
function blocks as required to carry out the desired control scheme.
8. Send the block to the Type SLC controller.
D.O. LOCK
4 - 26
CONFIGURATION
ANALOG OUTPUT = [ [ 100.0 ] × [ 1.00 ] ] + [ [ CONTROL OUTPUT ] × [ -1.00 ] ]
ANALOG OUTPUT = 100.0 – [ CONTROL OUTPUT ]
SLC I/O
100.0
7
PV
SP
SP
O
A
A
TR
C/R
TS
C
MI
C-F
AX
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
AI 3
AI 3
AI 4
AI 4
AO 1
AO 1
AO 2
AO 2
DO 1
DI 1
DO 2
DI 2
DO 3
DI 3
DO 4
DO 1
PI 1
DO 2
SPARE DO 3
DO 4
(80)
N+1
N
N+2
N+4
N+3
N+5
PI
STAT
N/A
N/A
(230)
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
M/A SLC
C/R
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
LX
CX
HAA
LAA
HDA
LDA
AO
TRS2
TRPV
Σ (K)
(15)
N
S1 = 7
S2 = BLOCK ADDRESS
OF CONTROL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
S3 = 1.00
S4 = -1.00
M/A
MFC/P
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
S1
S2
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S13
T
(231)
900
901
SL1
902
SL2
903
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
GPA 1
GPA 2
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
ALM 1 A/M 1
ALM 2 A/M 2
ASCII
A/M 3
OP 1
A/M 4
OP 2
N/A
OP 3
N/A
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
OP 4
TP80444A
Figure 4-4. Reverse Acting Controllers
MODIFYING A FACTORY CONFIGURATION
To use a factory configuration as a base configuration and then modify certain portions of it:
1. Follow the procedures listed under FACTORY CONFIGURATION. Once the configuration is saved, open the access door on the
front of the controller and plug in the Type CTT Configuration and
Tuning Terminal. Enter the module address for the Type SLC controller.
2. Press CONFIG and then F2 on the handheld terminal.
3. Refer to Table 4-2 and note the function code number of the function to modify or delete. To add a function code, refer to the Function
Code Application Manual.
4. Refer to the configuration section of the CTT Configuration and
Tuning Terminal instruction. Follow the procedures for adding, modifying or deleting function blocks.
MODIFYING A FACTORY CONFIGURATION
4 - 27
CONFIGURATION
5. After each change per function code, press SEND and then F2.
6. After all changes have been completed, press EXECUTE and
then F2.
7. The display on the handheld terminal will show execute mode.
NOTE: Selecting the add/modify option after entering a custom configuration will overwrite the custom configuration.
CUSTOM CONFIGURATION AIDS
Refer to Appendix A for skeleton function block drawings to aid when
developing a custom configuration.
CUSTOM CONFIGURATION AIDS
4 - 28
SECTION 5 - OPERATING PROCEDURES
INTRODUCTION
This section provides a description of the single function pushbuttons
and multi-function soft keys. It also describes the various screens
encountered during everyday operation, i.e., the process screen, the
main menu and all of the primary submenus of the main menu. Alarm
displays, along with steps for acknowledging those alarms, are given.
This section also describes routine operator functions such as changing the set point and control output values, changing modes, bypass
operation, changing the loop display on dual loop controllers, tuning
the PID constants and PV alarms, and monitoring the process.
NOTE: The operator should have knowledge of the process and
should read and understand this instruction before attempting any
procedure pertaining to the operation of the controller. The operator
should also be thoroughly educated in procedures for handling
alarm conditions.
SINGLE FUNCTION PUSHBUTTONS
The three marked pushbuttons at the bottom of the faceplate are single function keys.
s , t
Controls cursor movement, changes selection choices on screens,
and increments or decrements selected parameter values (SP, CO).
A/M
Allows choosing automatic or manual operation only at the process
display screen. After switching from manual to automatic, the process
will be under automatic control in response to the adjustment of a
local set point in the controller.
SEL
Allows selecting a highlighted parameter in a submenu. On screens
where no submenu exists, it will enter the displayed selection environment. It is also used to move between PV, SP, CO display/control in
the process display.
MULTI-FUNCTION SOFT KEYS
Three unmarked soft keys directly below the display are multi-function keys (Fig. 5-1). The specific function of these keys is defined by
the graphics and will vary depending on the screen displayed. When
no soft key menu is displayed directly above the soft keys, touching
any of these soft keys will display a soft key menu. Once this soft key
menu is displayed, pressing the soft key below the menu item desired
will initiate the defined action.
INTRODUCTION
5-1
OPERATING PROCEDURES
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
MAIN MENU
FULL/SPLIT SCRN
MONITOR
ALARM SUM
BYPASS
TUNE
D.O. CTRL
AUX. SWITCH
SETUP
CONFIGURE
UNMARKED
MULTI-FUNCTION
SOFT KEYS
SELECT
PUSHBUTTON
S
E
L
A
/
M
UP/DOWN
PUSHBUTTONS
AUTO/MANUAL
PUSHBUTTON
T02289A
Figure 5-1. Operator Interface Controls
NORMAL OPERATION
Normal operation occurs when communication has been established
between all the components within the Type SLC controller and
everything is operating properly. During normal operation:
1. The set point, process variable and control output will appear on
the front panel display.
2. The controller operates as a basic (single or dual loop PID), cascade or ratio station, depending upon the configuration entered.
POWER UP
Power up the unit. When the controller is first powered up, the following screen appears for a short time and then the process display
screen appears if a configuration is entered. If no configuration is
entered, the main menu screen appears.
During start-up, the controller is performing some self-diagnostics. If
one of the tests fails, a message will appear. Refer to Section 6.
NORMAL OPERATION
5-2
OPERATING PROCEDURES
ABB
SLC
PROCESS DISPLAY
The process display screen is the default screen upon power up
when a configuration does exist. The process screen displays information relative to the process: process variable, set points, control
output, tag name, mode, and if alarms exist. This screen can be
entered into from the main menu and other screens. No security level
can be placed on this environment. This screen can always be
reached from any other environment by pressing the middle
multi-function soft key. Refer to Table 5-1 and Figure 5-2 for a
description of all items encountered on the process display screen.
From the process display screen, several options are available if the
controller is set up for dual loop operation.
Table 5-1. Process Display Screen Descriptions
Item
Description
Function
1
Displayed variable indicator
Indicates the variable being displayed, either PV, SP, CO, A1 or A2.
2
Variable tracking indicator
Indicates when either CO or SP tracking is enabled. Will display TRK
when tracking is enabled, and nothing otherwise.
3
Selected variable analog value Analog value in EU of the selected variable, either PV, SP or CO for
a basic or cascade station, the multiplier for a ratio station, and A1/
A2 the auxiliary variables.
4
Selected variable EU
5-character EU of the selected variable. An X will be displayed when
in ratio mode.
5
Value multiplier
Indicates that the value being displayed is 1/1000 of the actual value.
6
Loop 1 mode indicator
Indicates the mode of loop 1:
Local:
Computer:
AUT - automatic
C-A - computer automatic
MAN - manual
C-M - computer manual
CAS - cascade
C-C - computer cascade
RAT - ratio
C-R - computer ratio
BYP - bypass
7
Loop 2 mode indicator
Indicates the mode of loop 2. Same as item 6.
8
Alarm indicator
Indicates there is currently an alarm condition. A flashing ALM
indicates an unacknowledged alarm.
PROCESS DISPLAY
5-3
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Table 5-1. Process Display Screen Descriptions (continued)
Item
Description
Function
9
Active loop’s faceplate switch
indicator
3-character label indicates the state of the active loop faceplate
switch. The ON and OFF labels are defined by the user in setup.
10
Active loop’s tag name
14-character tag name of the active loop. For tag names of 10
characters or less, a larger font is used to display the name.
11
PV high and low alarms
High and low alarm limits of the process variable as defined by the
user.
12
CO bar graph
Bar graph representation of the control output value.
13
PV bar graph
Bar graph representation of the process variable value.
14
SP bar graph
Bar graph representation of the set point value.
15
SP arrow
Indicates the value of the set point using the same scale as the
process variable.
16
CO high and low tag
CO high and low bar graph labels defined by the user in setup.
17
PV zero and span
PV bar graph scale auto-calculated based on the PV zero and span
defined by the user.
18
SP zero and span
SP bar graph scale auto-calculated based on the SP zero and span
defined by the user.
TYPE 2
3 VERTICAL BAR
TYPE 1
2 BAR
1
PV
2
TRK
300
219.0
CF/HR
x1000
17
11
15
H
225
ALM
3
1
PV
4
2
TRK
5
8
INT
9
8
219.0
ALM
1
PV
4
2
TRK
5
300
150
17
18
6
150
L2
L
7
AUT
225
75
150
0
75
-75
0
-150
6
9
INT
12
OPN
10
FIC-200
10
4
300
225
ALM
8
16
6
PV
0
L2
7
INT
9
AUT
SP
12
16
CLS
75
L
13
12
SP
5
11
7
14
PV
CLS
3
CF/HR
x1000
150
L2
AUT
OPN
14
16
219.0
H
13
13
0
3
17
11
75
CF/HR
x1000
TYPE 3
2 VERTICAL BAR
OPN
FIC-200
CLS
FIC-200
16
10
16
16
TYPE 4
2 VERTICAL BAR
(REVERSE)
1
3
17
1
PV
2
TRK
219.0
CF/HR
x1000
300
17
H
225
ALM
4
5
8
SPLIT
SCREEN
300
2
TRK
13
ALM
CLS
8
L2
75
14
13
SP
0
L
AUT
INT
16
9
17
CLS
CLS
FIC-200
4
5
6
16
12
x1000
ALM
7
MAN
16
OPN
3
OPN
FIC-200
300 PV
219.0
TRK
CF/HR
PV
12
10
7
MAN
0
10
11
219.0
CF/HR
x1000
15
6
150
PV
OPN
16
0
FIC-201
TP80480B
Figure 5-2. Process Display Screen
PROCESS DISPLAY
5-4
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Full Screen or Split Screen
For single loop controllers, the process display screen is full size. For
dual loop controllers, the process display can be full size or split
screen, showing both loop 1 and loop 2.
1. To change to split screen, press any unmarked soft key. At the
soft key menu, press the soft key below MAIN MENU.
2. At the main menu, the other available choice will be highlighted. If
presently using a full screen display, SPLIT SCRN will appear on the
menu, or vice versa.
3. Press
SEL
when the correct selection is highlighted.
Change Loop
From the process display screen, it is possible to move from loop one
to loop two in full screen or split screen mode on dual loop controllers.
1. Press any soft key and the soft key menu will appear.
2. Press the soft key below CHNG LOOP.
Set Point, Control Output and Changing Modes
The Type SLC controller has three types of station functions: basic,
cascade or ratio. The principal difference between the three station
functions is the method in which the set point is generated.
The procedures for adjusting the set point and control output are
dependent on the type of station for which the controller is configured
and the operating mode (auto, manual or bypass) of the controller. To
complete operator adjustments, locate the station type and follow the
procedures listed.
In some instances, the controller mode has to be changed before an
adjustment can be made.
BASIC STATION
If the controller is configured as a basic station (single or dual PID
configuration, internal set point), use the following procedures to set
or change the set point, control output, and to change the controller
mode if required. Table 5-2 explains what mode the controller needs
to be in to effect a change in set point or control output through the
faceplate.
NOTE: For external set point basic stations, the set point TRK
(track) indicator is displayed and the set point cannot be modified.
PROCESS DISPLAY
5-5
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Table 5-2. Basic Station - Adjusting
SP and CO from the Faceplate
Mode
Adjust Set Point
(SP)
Adjust Control Output
(CO)
Manual
Yes
Yes
Auto
Yes
No (change to MAN or BYP)
Bypass
Yes
Yes
Set Point - Basic Station
To adjust the set point on a controller configured for single or dual
loop PID, refer to Table 5-2 to check mode and use the following procedures.
1. The controller can be in manual, auto or bypass mode to change
the set point at the faceplate. If in AUTO and at the process display
screen, press s and t . The SP display will appear immediately in
the upper left hand corner of the display. If in MAN or BYP, press SEL
until SP appears.
2. Use s and t to select the new set point. The value in the upper
right hand corner of the display will show the values ramping up or
down and the arrow to the right of the scale will move to follow the
new value.
3. To control the set point of the other loop in a dual loop controller,
from the full screen or split screen process display, press one of the
three unmarked soft keys and a soft key menu will appear. Press the
soft key below CHNG LOOP. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to adjust the set
point.
Control Output - Basic Station
1. To adjust the control output at the faceplate in the loop displayed,
the controller must be in manual or bypass mode (Table 5-2). If in
auto, refer to Changing Modes - Basic Station. Press SEL until CO
appears in the upper left corner of the display.
2. Use s and t to select the new control output. The value in the
upper right hand corner of the display will show the values ramping
up or down and the CO bar graph will move right or left (up or down
on Type 2 display).
3. To control the output of the other loop in a dual loop controller,
from the full screen or split screen process display, press one of the
three unmarked soft keys and a soft key menu will appear.
4. Press the key below CHNG LOOP to switch loops. Adjust the
control output of that loop by repeating Steps 1 and 2.
PROCESS DISPLAY
5-6
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Changing Modes - Basic Station
1. To move from AUTO to MAN, press
A/M .
2. To move from MAN to AUTO, press
A/M .
CASCADE STATION
If the controller is configured as a cascade station (cascade configuration), it is similar to a basic station, but receives an input from an
external source during automatic control. That input is the remote set
point to the controller.
To adjust the internal set point and the control output on a controller
configured for cascade, use the following procedures. Table 5-3
explains the controller mode selections required to effect a change in
set point or control output through the faceplate.
Table 5-3. Cascade Station - Adjusting
SP and CO from the Faceplate
Mode
Adjust Set Point
(SP)
Adjust Control Output
(CO)
Manual
Yes
Yes
Auto
Yes
Cascade
No (change to AUTO,
MAN or BYP)
No (change to MAN or
BYP)
Bypass
Yes
Yes
Set Point - Cascade Station
1. The controller can be in manual, auto or bypass mode to change
the set point at the faceplate. If in AUTO and at the process display
screen, press s and t . The SP display will appear immediately in
the upper left hand corner of the display. If in MAN or BYP and PV or
CO is displayed, press SEL until SP appears.
2. Use s and t to select the new set point. The value in the upper
right hand corner of the display will show the values ramping up or
down and the arrow to the right of the scale will move to follow the
new value.
Changing the Control Output - Cascade Station
1. To adjust the control output at the faceplate, the controller must
be in manual or bypass mode (Table 5-3). If in auto, refer to Changing Modes - Cascade Station. Press SEL until CO appears in the
upper left corner of the display.
PROCESS DISPLAY
5-7
OPERATING PROCEDURES
2. Use s and t to select the new control output. The value in the
upper right hand corner of the display will show the values ramping
up or down and the CO bar graph will move right or left (up or down
on Type 2 display).
Changing Modes - Cascade Station
To change modes, perform the following procedures and refer to Figure 5-3.
Controller in AUTO
Controller in MAN
1.
To change to MAN, press
A/M .
2.
To change to CASCADE, press the left soft key (F1).
1.
To change to AUTO, press
2. To change to CAS, press
the left soft key (F1).
Controller in CAS
A/M .
A/M
to change to AUTO, then press
1.
To change to MAN, press
A/M .
2.
To change to AUTO, press the left soft key (F1).
AUTO
A/M
A/M
F1
(LEFT SOFT
KEY)
MANUAL
A/M
F1
(LEFT SOFT
KEY)
CASCADE
OR
RATIO
TP80415A
Figure 5-3. Changing Controller Modes
RATIO STATION
If the controller is configured as a ratio station, it differs from a basic
and cascade station in that the set point is determined by a wild or
uncontrolled variable. The set point is calculated by multiplying the
uncontrolled variable by a predetermined multiplier. During ratio
operation, the multiplication constant for the process can be modified
through the set point raise/lower pushbuttons. Ratio multipliers can
range from 0.01 to 10.0. To adjust the set point (ratio index) and the
control output on a controller configured for ratio, use the following
procedures. Table 5-4 explains in which mode the controller needs to
PROCESS DISPLAY
5-8
OPERATING PROCEDURES
be to effect a change in set point or control output through the faceplate.
Table 5-4. Ratio Station - Adjusting
SP and CO from the Faceplate
Adjust Set Point
(SP)
Mode
Adjust Control Output
(CO)
Manual
Yes
Yes
Auto
Yes
Ratio
No (change to AUTO,
MAN or BYP)
No (change to MAN
or BYP)
Bypass
Yes
1
Yes
NOTE:
1. For custom configuration users, the set point can be adjusted from the faceplate if
the ratio N+1 of S2 in function code 80 is adjusted.
Changing the Set Point - Ratio Station
If the controller is operating as a ratio station, the operations are the
same as a basic station.
1. The controller can be in manual, auto or bypass mode to change
the set point at the faceplate. If in AUTO and at the process display
screen, press s and t . The SP display will appear immediately in
the upper left hand corner of the display. If in MAN or BYP and PV or
CO is displayed, press SEL until SP appears.
2. Use s and t to select the new set point. The value in the upper
right hand corner of the display will show the values ramping up or
down and the arrow to the right of the scale will move to follow the
new value.
During ratio operation, the multiplication constant for the process can
be modified by pressing s and t .
Changing the Control Output - Ratio Station
1. To adjust the control output at the faceplate, the controller must
be in manual or bypass mode (Table 5-4). If in auto, refer to Changing Modes - Ratio Station. Press SEL until CO appears in the upper
left corner of the display.
2. Use s and t to select the new control output. The value in the
upper right hand corner of the display will show the values ramping
up or down and the CO bar graph will move right or left (up or down
on Type 2 display).
PROCESS DISPLAY
5-9
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Changing Modes - Ratio Station
To change modes, perform the following procedures (Fig. 5-3).
Controller in AUTO
1. To change to MAN, press
A/M .
2. To change to RATIO, press the left soft key (F1).
Controller in MAN
1. To change to AUTO, press
2. To change to RAT, press
left soft key (F1).
Controller in RATIO
1. To change to MAN, press
A/M .
A/M
to change to AUTO, then press the
A/M .
2. To change to AUTO, press the left soft key (F1).
MAIN MENU
The main menu is the starting point to all other functions that need to
be completed. From the process display screen, press any soft key
and the soft key submenu will appear. Press the soft key under MAIN
MENU to enter this environment.
Availability of operator adjustments is dependent on the security
assigned during the setup procedures. Looking at the main menu,
there are five environments which can have security assigned. Security levels and passwords are not mandatory; the controller operates
without them. The type of adjustments that can be made will depend
on the current type of security assigned and the security status.
The main menu is the default screen upon power up when the unit is
not configured. It can also be entered into from other screens via the
multi-function soft keys. This screen is the gateway to all of the other
environments except for the process display screen. The security levels of the different environments are displayed on the main menu and
are represented by a T (technician), M (master) or blank (none). The
security passwords and security levels are set during the setup procedures. To move the highlight from one function to another, press s
and t . Press SEL when the choice has been highlighted.
Pressing any of the three soft keys below the faceplate will bring up
the soft key submenu. Press the soft key below the display to return
to the process display.
MAIN MENU
5 - 10
OPERATING PROCEDURES
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
MAIN MENU
SPLIT SCRN
MONITOR
ALM SUM
BYPASS
TUNE
D.O. CTRL
AUX SWITCH
SETUP
CONFIGURE
T
T
T
T
M
M
PROC
DSPL
MONITOR
The monitor environment allows observing the controller I/O in a
grouped fashion, i.e., all of the analog inputs together, all the analog
outputs together, the digital I/O and block outputs, etc.
This environment is for monitoring and diagnostic purposes and can
be entered from the main menu. The first four menu items are for
monitoring; the status menu item is for diagnostics. No security level
can be placed on this environment.
1. From the process display screen, press any soft key to bring up
the soft key menu. Press the key below MAIN MENU.
2. From the main menu, use s and t to highlight MONITOR.
Press SEL . Use s and t to highlight ANALOG IN, ANALOG OUT,
DIGITAL I/O, or BLOCK OUT, then press SEL .
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
MONITOR
ANALOG IN
ANALOG OUT
DIGITAL I/O
BLOCK OUT
STATUS
MAIN
MENU
2
PROC
DSPL
3. To continue the monitor function, the next monitor subject that
can be viewed is shown on the soft key menu (far right side). Press
the soft key below that function to continue to the STATUS menu
item, or return to the monitor menu or the process display.
MONITOR
5 - 11
OPERATING PROCEDURES
The status function provides the operator with diagnostic information
and firmware revision levels.
1. Use s or t to highlight STATUS. The status screen provides
status bytes 1 through 5 in hexadecimal. These bytes are located
directly below the MODSTATUS display. The first two status bytes
have common meaning for all control units. The last three status
bytes contain specific error information. If a problem occurs, this information can be useful when talking to a service representative. To
obtain the status information, the hexadecimal bytes must be converted to binary format. Refer to the CTT Configuration and Tuning
Terminal instruction. Reference the information in the Operating
Status Display section and the hexadecimal conversion table. Refer
also to Table G-10 in the Function Code Application Manual for an
explanation of the abbreviated tests listed on the MODSTATUS
screen.
L1: MAN
MODSTATUS
ES MODE
FTX BAC RIO
LIO CFG NVF NVI DLS -
7980000000
1
STATUS 1
NONE
EXE
STATUS 2
YES
GOOD
GOOD
GOOD
NO
GOOD
NO
GOOD
MAIN
MENU
PROC
DSPL
NOTE: The status screen shows all 5 status
bytes under MODSTATUS. Descriptions of status bytes 1 and 2 are displayed on this screen.
Refer to the CTT Configuration and Tuning
Terminal instruction for a complete description
of status bytes 3, 4 and 5.
NEXT
SCRN
2. To check the revision level of the main and operator interface
boards, press the soft key below NEXT SCRN.
L1: MAN
S/W REV
2
Main Brd:
Opint Brd:
PREV
SCRN
MONITOR
5 - 12
PROC
DSPL
MAIN
MENU
OPERATING PROCEDURES
ALARM SUMMARY
When an alarm occurs, an alarm indication will be displayed. The
type of alarm indicator may vary depending on the current screen and
the type of alarm. A blinking alarm indicator indicates that one of
more alarms have occurred and have not been acknowledged.
The alarm summary selection allows viewing all active alarms, both
loop specific as well as general purpose and also displays if the controller is in bypass. Bypass alarm states include BYP TRANS, BYP
ERROR, BYP LOCK, BYP CFG and BYP NO STATION. Alarms are
listed in the order that they occur. A blinking alarm indicates that the
alarm has not been acknowledged.
1. Press any of the three soft keys to bring up the soft key submenu.
2. Press the soft key below the display to initiate the action required.
If the display is full and additional alarms are indicated, press s or
t .
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
ALM SUM
NO ALARMS
TO
REPORT
MAIN
MENU
PROC
DSPL
2
ALM
ACK
An alarm condition can be acknowledged from the process display
screen or from the alarm summary screen off the main menu. In addition to the alarm indication, a soft key menu will appear. Depending
on the screen displayed at the time of the alarm, some of the following functions will be available to the user from the soft key menu.
•
•
•
•
•
ALM ACK - acknowledge any alarms for the active loop.
ALM SUM - go to the alarm summary screen.
CHNG LOOP - change the active loop.
CONT - continue working and ignore the current alarm.
PROC DSPL - go to the process display screen.
Table 5-5 lists alarm types, screen displays being viewed when alarm
condition occurs, and the various soft key menus available.
ALARM SUMMARY
5 - 13
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Table 5-5. Acknowledging Alarms
Screen Type
(Active Loop)
Soft Key
Alarm
Left
Middle
Right
Process/trend display (L1)
Loop 1
ALM SUM
CHNG LOOP
ALM ACK
Process/trend display (L2)
Loop 1
ALM SUM
CHNG LOOP
—
Process/trend display (L1)
General
ALM SUM
CHNG LOOP
—
Loop 1, loop 2
ALM SUM
CHNG LOOP
ALM ACK
ALM SUM
PROC DSPL
CONT
Loop 1, loop 2, general
Non process display
Loop
General
Loop, general
ACKNOWLEDGING ALARM FROM THE MAIN MENU
1. From the main menu, use s or t to highlight ALM SUM. The
alarm summary screen allows viewing all active alarms, both loop
specific as well as general purpose. The blinking alarm indicates the
alarm has not been acknowledged.
2. To acknowledge the alarm, press the soft key below ALM ACK.
The blinking will discontinue. Follow the necessary procedures to
eliminate the alarm indication from the screen.
Return to normal operating conditions once the alarm condition has
been corrected.
BYPASS
Bypass operation is a condition in which the operator interface board
takes control of analog outputs one and two. The output associated
with the active loop can be modified.
This mode is useful if the main board fails or if the communications
link between boards is lost. The controller will be in bypass whenever
the unit is entered into the configure mode. The BYP mode indicator
on the faceplate indicates the unit is in bypass. The controller will
alarm when bypass mode is entered.
To control analog output one, the controller must be on loop one. To
control analog output two, the controller must be on loop two.
The bypass environment allows placing the bypass lock on or off
depending on the current state of the controller. If the unit is placed
into bypass mode, an alarm condition will occur.
Press the soft key below the display to initiate the action required.
When the controller enters a bypass mode automatically, it should
return to normal operation once the error condition is corrected and
the controller is returned to manual or automatic control.
ACKNOWLEDGING ALARM FROM THE MAIN MENU
5 - 14
OPERATING PROCEDURES
If bypass is entered manually, it will override the automatic operation
until manually changed back.
To manually initiate bypass operation:
1. Use the soft keys to enter the main menu.
2. From the main menu, use
SEL .
s
or
t
to highlight BYPASS. Press
3. The bypass screen will appear. Press the soft key below YES to
place the bypass lock ON. The controller will be in bypass mode.
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
BYPASS
BYPASS LOCK
is [OFF/ON]
[LOCK?/UNLOCK?]
Manual Ctrl
will be
Required
ESC
PROC
DSPL
YES
3
4. When the operator interface makes a transition from normal operation to bypass, the board generates analog outputs that correspond
to the last output values when in normal operation.
Refer to FAIL [AO#1] under LOOP OPTIONS in Section 3 for additional information.
TUNE
There are two tune functions available: tuning the PID constants and
tuning the PV alarms. Entry to the tune environment is from the main
menu.
PID Constants
The tune environment allows examining the configuration and modifying some tunable PID constants that affect controller response.
The tune feature can identify up to two PID loops to tune. Tune associates the first PID block (numerically lowest block address) with loop
one, and the second PID block with loop two. The block address of
the function code is the primary key.
The tunable parameters are documented in the worksheets in
Appendix B. This environment can only be entered from the main
TUNE
5 - 15
OPERATING PROCEDURES
menu. From the main menu, use
SEL .
or
s
to highlight TUNE. Press
t
NOTE: Whenever SEL is pressed in the following steps, a soft key
menu appears.
←
ESC
→
Use ← and → to position the cursor; use s or t to change the
parameter values. ESC (escape) returns an entry to its original value.
Press the soft key below the display to initiate the action required.
NOTE: Pressing the soft key below TUNE ALM makes the PV alarm
screen appear.
1. From the main menu, use
s
or
t
to highlight TUNE. Press
2. CONV FACTOR should be highlighted. Press
to enter the new conversion factor. Press SEL .
3. Use s or t to highlight KP. Press
the new KP factor. Press SEL .
4. Use s or t to highlight KI. Press
new KI factor. Press SEL .
SEL
5. Use s or t to highlight KD. Press
the new KD factor. Press SEL .
L1: BYP
SEL
. Use
SEL
. Use
s
s
or
to enter
or
t
s
or
SEL
. Use
s
. Use
SEL .
t
or
t
to enter the
t
to enter
L2: BYP
TUNE
PV:
CO:
KP:
KI:
KD:
MAIN
MENU
XXX.XX
XXX.XX
CONV FACTOR
XXX.XXX
2
XXX.XXX
XXX.X
XXX.X
3
4
5
PROC
DSPL
TUNE
ALM
6. Press the soft key below the soft key menu display to go to MAIN
MENU, PROC DSPL or TUNE ALM.
TUNE
5 - 16
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Process Variable (PV) Alarms
This is a tune function and access is gained through the main menu.
The tune environment allows examining the configuration and modifying some tunable PV alarm constants that affect controller response.
The tune alarms function allows setting the process variable high and
low alarms. The alarm settings must be within the value of the process variable span.
Press the soft key below the display to initiate the action required.
1. From the main menu, use
s
or
t
to highlight TUNE. Press
SEL .
2. When the tune PID screen comes up, press the soft key below
TUNE ALM to get to the correct screen.
3. With PV HI ALM highlighted, press SEL and then s or t to set
the process variable high alarm. When the correct value is reached,
press SEL .
4. Press t to highlight PV LO ALM. Press SEL and then s or t to
set the process variable high alarm. When the correct value is
reached, press SEL .
NOTE: When SEL is pressed to change a selection, ESC appears
on the soft key menu. Press the soft key below to return an entry to
its original value.
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
TUNE
PV:
CO:
XXX.X
XXX.X
PV HI ALARM
XXX.XX (E.U.)
3
PV LO ALARM
XXX.XX (E.U.)
4
TUNE
PID
PROC
DSPL
TRND
SCRN
5. Press the soft key below TUNE PID, PROC DSPL or TRND
SCRN.
6. If TRND SCRN is chosen, the trend screen will appear (Fig. 5-4).
The following functions are available:
a. Change controller mode between manual and auto by pressing A/M .
TUNE
5 - 17
OPERATING PROCEDURES
b. Change the set point (SP) or control output (CO). Press
Press s or t to change the value.
SEL .
c. Change set point in auto or manual. Change control output
only in manual.
NOTE: The trend values are not stored. Historical data is lost when
departing the trend screen.
7. To leave this environment, press any soft key and a soft key
menu will appear. Select PREV SCRN, PROC DSPL or MAIN MENU.
TRACK INDICATORS
CURSOR
PV EU
PV
SPt
COt
PCT
75.00 AUT
80.00 EXT
25.00 X1K
SP
A
L
M
PV
MODE (MAN/AUTO)
FACEPLATE SWITCH
×1000 INDICATOR
PV HI ALARM SP
ALARM INDICATOR
SET POINT INDICATOR
PV BAR GRAPH
CO
CO BAR GRAPH
TIME
BASE
24.0 SEC
PV LO ALARM SP
TAGNAME 1
TAG NAME
TP80537A
Figure 5-4. Trend Screen Description
D.O. CONTROL
Digital output control allows manually controlling each digital output
provided each digital output is unlocked.
Factory Configuration
Users
When *LOCK appears, the digital output is locked out through the
setup procedures.
Custom or Modified
Factory Configuration
Users
When LOCK appears (without asterisk), the digital output is locked
out through the configuration procedures. Refer to function code 231,
specifications S12 through S16.
Press the soft key below the display to initiate the action required. To
change the state of the digital outputs that are not locked:
1. From the main menu, press s or t to select D.O. CTRL. Press
SEL . The DIG CTRL screen will appear.
D.O. CONTROL
5 - 18
OPERATING PROCEDURES
2. Press s or t to choose the D.O. number to be changed. Place
the D.O. in MAN mode by pressing the soft key below AUT/MAN until
the display reads MAN. Press SEL to change the state of the digital
output.
3. When changes have been completed, press the soft key below
MAIN MENU or PROC DSPL to return to those environments.
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
DIG CTRL
D.O.
#1
#2
#3
#4
ST
MODE
0
0
0
0
LOCK
*LOCK
MAN
AUT
[SEL - TO CHANGE]
MAIN
MENU
PROC
DSPL
SEL - TO CHANGE only appears if the current
digital output is in MAN mode. AUT is the default.
AUT/
MAN
AUXILIARY SWITCH OUTPUTS
This screen is only applicable for custom or modified factory configurations. This function provides Boolean outputs from the M/A-SLC
function block during execute mode. These are reset in bypass mode.
The Boolean value (change state) of the four auxiliary switch outputs
on loop station, function code 231, outputs 904 through 907 (one
through four respectively) can be individually adjusted.
These are general purpose switches that are user-defined. The labels
for the switches are assigned during the setup procedures. Most frequent usage is to access digital outputs for alarms, etc.
AUXILIARY SWITCH OUTPUTS
5 - 19
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Press the soft key below the display to initiate the action required.
To change the state of an auxiliary switch:
1. From the main menu, press s or t to select AUX SWITCH.
Press SEL . The AUX SWTCH screen will appear.
2. Press s or t to choose the switch number. Press SEL to
change the state of the auxiliary switch. The new switch label will
appear.
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
AUX SWITCH
SW
#1
#2
#3
#4
STATE
______
______
______
______
2
[SEL - TO CHANGE]
MAIN
MENU
PROC
DSPL
3. When changes have been completed, press the soft key below
MAIN MENU or PROC DSPL to return to those environments.
CONTROLLER RESET
WARNING
Be aware of the effects on the process before pressing the
RESET button. Pressing the RESET button causes momentary
loss (approximately five seconds) of process control. Some
process upsets can injure personnel and damage equipment.
AVERTISSEMENT
Soyez conscients des conséquences sur le processus avant
d’appuyer sur le bouton de remise à l’état initial (RESET). Ceci
provoque une perte momentanée (environ cinq secondes) de la
commande du processus. Certaines perturbations du processus pourraient provoquer des blessures et des dommages
matériels.
NOTE: For custom or modified factory configurations, this warning
lists a five-second loss of automatic process control when the reset
button is pressed. This loss of time could be more depending on the
module start-up time configured. Refer to function code 90, block
20, S4.
The controller reset button is located behind the access door below
the display area. This button may be used when the main board
CONTROLLER RESET
5 - 20
OPERATING PROCEDURES
times-out or goes into an error mode. Pressing the reset button
causes the I/O to go through:
•
•
•
•
Fail state.
Power up state.
Start-up.
Execute.
When the reset button is pushed, the controller will go to bypass
mode for one or both loops and will display an alarm condition. This
bypass mode is indicated on the process display screens.
MODES OF OPERATION WHEN USING TYPE CTT TERMINAL
NOTE: This information applies only to users of a Type CTT Configuration and Tuning Terminal.
The Type SLC controller has three modes of operation when used
with a Type CTT terminal: execute, configure and error. The five
modes of operation indicated on the faceplate of a Type SLC controller are automatic, manual, bypass, cascade and ratio. Table 5-6
shows how these modes compare to one another.
Table 5-6. Modes of Operation Comparison
Type SLC Controller
Modes of Operation
When using Type CTT
terminal
Execute
Configuration Error
When Type CTT terminal is
not used (corresponding
mode on faceplate)
Manual
Bypass
Auto Cascade
Ratio
Bypass
Execute
The execute mode is the normal mode of operation for the Type SLC
controller. The controller reads the configuration, monitors and
updates outputs, computes the algorithms, and performs self-diagnostic routines. The configuration cannot be changed, but parameters
may be tuned and block outputs can be monitored.
Configure
The configure mode is used to enter new configuration data, and
delete or modify an existing configuration. When bypass mode is
entered, the analog outputs are held at their present value, the digital
outputs are de-energized, and the algorithms are not computed. Existing parameters can be modified, blocks can be deleted or added, and
all parameters can be adjusted using the Type CTT Configuration and
Tuning Terminal.
MODES OF OPERATION WHEN USING TYPE CTT TERMINAL
5 - 21
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Error
When transferring to the execute mode, the Type SLC controller may
enter the error mode if a configuration error is detected. If this occurs,
refer to the CTT Configuration and Tuning Terminal instruction to
determine the cause of the error. Also refer to the status information
under MONITOR. The controller must then be placed into configure
mode to correct the problem before placing the unit into execute
mode. Depending on the configuration, the error mode may also be
entered from the execute mode by the occurrence of one of the following:
•
•
The trip block is activated.
A self-diagnostic failure occurs.
If either condition occurs, the Type SLC controller will enter the
bypass mode. The Type CTT terminal will, when addressing the controller, report VACANT. Refer to Appendix D of the Function Code
Application Manual for byte information.
1. Press RESET on the controller to receive the error message.
Refer to the CTT Configuration and Tuning Terminal instruction to
determine the cause of the error.
2. After the error has been corrected, place the Type SLC controller
into configure mode first and then into execute mode. As Figure 5-5
indicates, the execute mode is only accessible through the configure
mode.
When in the error mode, both analog outputs are in bypass mode and
the digital outputs are de-energized.
EXECUTE
MODE
CONFIGURE
MODE
ERROR
MODE
TP80072A
Figure 5-5. Entering the Execute Mode
MODES OF OPERATION WHEN USING TYPE CTT TERMINAL
5 - 22
SECTION 6 - TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS
INTRODUCTION
NOTE: Troubleshooting and diagnostic personnel should be qualified electrical technicians or engineers that know the proper use of
test equipment and have a good understanding of troubleshooting
procedures. They should also be familiar with the equipment, have
experience working with process control systems, and know what
precautions to take when working on live AC systems.
This section provides several checking procedures of problems that
could be encountered during troubleshooting. The Type SLC controller has on-line diagnostics to help determine and isolate problems
encountered. The diagnostics can be accessed through the monitor
menu under STATUS and also through the setup menu under DIAGNOSTICS. Also included in this section is a troubleshooting flowchart.
If a Type CTT handheld terminal is being used, information through
error messages is available to help identify the problem. Refer to the
diagnostics section of the CTT Configuration and Tuning Terminal
instruction.
If the Type SLC controller is inoperative or operation is faulty, refer to
the troubleshooting flowchart (Fig. 6-1).
NOTE: The troubleshooting flowchart contains sections pertaining to
the Type CTT terminal. For factory configurations, ignore those
blocks and proceed to the next applicable block.
CHECKING PROCESS CONTROL INTEGRITY
Hardware and software security functions help minimize the impact of
errors on the controlled process.
The Type SLC controller performs on-line diagnostic tests to insure
process control integrity. If an error is detected:
•
•
Execution of algorithms ceases.
The controller enters into the bypass mode and the analog outputs go to their user-selected default state determined during the
setup procedures.
•
Digital outputs de-energize.
•
NVRAM is inhibited (cannot be erased or written).
•
The module bus and internal communications cease. The controller may indicate VACANT when addressed.
INTRODUCTION
6-1
RESEAT ALL
CONNECTORS
Y
FACEPLATE
LIGHTS UP?
N
CHECK FUSES RESEAT BOARDS
AND CONNECTORS
FUSE GOOD?
Y
LIGHTS ON BUT
NO RESPONSE
HANDHELD
CTT REPORTS
ERROR?
Y
N
UNIT IN
CONFIGURE
MODE?
Y
ENTER
CONFIGURATION PUT IN EXECUTE
CHECK 120/220 VAC
SETTING ON POWER
SUPPLY BOARD
CHECK FIELD WIRING
FOR SHORTS
PUT UNIT IN
CONFIGURE MODE
CHECK MODULE
BUS TOTAL LENGTH
DETERMINE AND
CORRECT ERROR
DISCONNECT
MODULE FROM BUS
EXECUTE MODE
TRY DIFFERENT CTT
CHECK FIELD WIRING
FOR SHORTS
CHECK INSERTION OF
BOARDS AND RIBBON
CABLE INCLUDING
POSITION OF CABLE
RESTART UNIT
RESTART OR REPLACE
POWER SUPPLY BOARD
CHECK MODULE
BUS CONNECTIONS
TO ALL UNITS ON
THE BUS
HANDHELD
CTT REPORTS
VACANT?
24 VDC
SUPPLY
GOOD?
N
REPLACE FUSE
Y
N
REFER TO CTT01/02
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
ERROR CODES
CHECK 120/220 VAC
SETTING ON POWER
SUPPLY BOARD
N
CONTINUE
START-UP
RESTART
UNIT - IS IT
GOOD?
Y
FUSE
BLOWS
AGAIN?
N
CONTINUE
START-UP
Y
N
MAIN BOARD BAD RETURN TO
BAILEY
RETURN TO BAILEY
FOR REPAIR
N
Y
CHECK MODULE
ADDRESS SCREEN
SEE
NOTE
Y
HANDHELD
CTT REPORTS
ERROR?
N
PRESS RESET
BUTTON
RETURN TO BAILEY
FOR REPAIR
NOTE: ERROR REPORTED VIA PRESSING F4-DIAGNOSTICS OR
VIA STATUS BYTES. PRESS F3 WHEN MODULE STATUS SCREEN
IS DISPLAYED FOR STATUS BYTES.
TP80416A
Figure 6-1. Troubleshooting Flowchart
TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS
CHECKING PROCESS CONTROL INTEGRITY
6-2
UNIT INSTALLED
PROPERLY
TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
There are two diagnostic tools available. The first tool provides a
series of self-tests the controller automatically runs at start-up. The
DIAGNOSTICS menu selection from the setup menu also provides
those self-tests plus an additional group of tests. The second tool is
the STATUS menu selection from the monitor menu. It provides specific error information through a display of status bytes.
If no security level was assigned to the setup function, a master password is required to enter the diagnostics screen. The tests on the first
and second diagnostic screen are for the main board and operator
interface board, respectively. These tests run automatically when the
diagnostics screen is entered. The third diagnostics screen contains I/
O and keyboard tests.
1. From the setup menu, press ▲ or t until DIAGNOSTICS is highlighted. Press SEL . A warning screen notes the output may change
and the unit is to be placed in bypass. Press any key; the first diagnostics screen (main board tests) appears. If any of the tests show
FAIL, refer to Table 6-1 for corrective action.
2. Press any key to continue. The second diagnostics screen (operator interface board) will be displayed. If any of the tests show FAIL,
refer to Table 6-1 for corrective action.
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
DIAGS
MAIN BOARD
IBL
[PASS/FAILXX]
SRAM [PASS/FAILXX]
NVRAM [PASS/FAILXX]
ROM
[PASS/FAILXX]
OPT BRD [YES/NO]
SER PRT [YES/NO]
PRESS ANY KEY
TO CONTINUE
SET
MENU
PROC
DSPL
L1: BYP
1
Main Board Tests
Interboard communications link.
Static RAM.
Nonvolatile RAM.
Read only memory firmware.
Is option board installed?
Is serial interface installed?
MAIN
MENU
L2: BYP
DIAGS
2
OPINT BRD
SRAM
[PASS/FAILXX]
EEPROM
[PASS/FAILXX]
ROM 1
[PASS/FAILXX]
ROM 2
[PASS/FAILXX]
PRESS ANY KEY
TO CONTINUE
SET
MENU
PROC
DSPL
Operator Interface Board Tests
Static RAM.
Programmable read only memory firmware.
Read only memory firmware.
Read only memory firmware.
MAIN
MENU
DIAGNOSTICS
6-3
TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS
WARNING
The output tests could cause process upsets if the unit is connected to the process while the tests are performed. Some process upsets can lead to injury and equipment damage. The last
six tests on the diagnostics screen verify the I/O operation
without configuration interaction.
AVERTISSEMENT
Les tests de sortie pourraient causer des dérangements au
procédé si le contrôleur est raccordé au procédé au moment
où ces tests sont effectués. Certains dérangements du procédé
pourraient causer des blessures ou des dommages à l’équipement. Les six (6) tests indiqués à l’écran des diagnostiques
vérifient le fonctionnement des entrées/sorties sans l’interaction de la configuration.
3. When main board and operator interface board tests are completed, press any key to continue. The third diagnostics screen (I/O
tests) will appear. The READ AI test will be highlighted. From this
point, choose to run any, all, or none of the remaining six tests. To run
any of the remaining tests, press ▲ or t until the test desired is
highlighted. Press SEL . If any of the tests show FAIL, refer to Table
6-1 for corrective action.
L1: BYP
L2: BYP
DIAGS
Input/Output Tests
3
READ AI
SET AO
READ DI
SET DO
BYP AO
KEYPAD
Read analog input. Same as a monitor function.
User can set AO, 0 to 100%.
Read digital input. Same as monitor function.
User can set DO, 0 or 1.
Tests operator interface board. User can set
AO, 0 to 100%.
Checks functions of all pushbuttons and keys.
PRESS ANY KEY
TO CONTINUE
SET
MENU
PROC
DSPL
MAIN
MENU
4. Once tests are completed, press any soft key and a soft key submenu appears. Press the key below your selection.
Table 6-1. Diagnostic Tests
Board or
Test
Main board
Display
Description
Checking Procedures
Corrective Action
IBL [FAIL]
Check ribbon connector cable connections If cable connections are bad,
between operator interface board and main replace ribbon connector (refer
board.
to Section 8).
SRAM [FAIL]
None.
Replace main board (refer to
Section 8).
NVRAM [FAIL]
Replace NVRAM (U10, U11).
ROM [FAIL]
Replace ROM (U12).
If test still fails, replace main
board. Refer to Section 8 for
board and NVRAM or ROM
replacement instructions.
DIAGNOSTICS
6-4
TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS
Table 6-1. Diagnostic Tests (continued)
Board or
Test
Main board
Display
Description
OPT BRD
Checking Procedures
Corrective Action
Checks to see if option board is installed.
None.
(continued)
Serial port
SER PRT
Checks to see if serial port is installed.
None.
Operator
interface
board
SRAM [FAIL]
None.
Replace operator interface
board (refer to Section 8).
ROM 1 [FAIL]
Replace ROM (XU18).
ROM 2 [FAIL]
Replace ROM (XU6).
If test still fails, replace
operator interface board (refer
to Section 8).
READ AI
Enter and verify the values on screen
display are correct.
If not correct, refer to
Section 8.
I/O tests
EEPROM
[FAIL]
Set from 0 to 100%. Verify reading at
termination unit terminal block.
READ DI
Enter and verify that values on screen
display are correct.
SET DO
Set digital outputs to 0 or 1. Verify reading
at termination unit terminal block.
BYP AO
Check ribbon connector cable between
operator interface board and main board.
Replace operator interface
board (refer to Section 8).
Press each key on the controller faceplate.
Screen display will echo key depressed.
Replace faceplate assembly
(refer to Section 8).
Keypad test KEYPAD
ERROR MESSAGES
Error messages appear on the faceplate display through menu selections. DIAGNOSTICS in the setup menu and STATUS in the monitor
menu both provide error information.
If the Type CTT terminal is being used with the controller, refer to the
CTT Configuration and Tuning Terminal instruction for error messages and recovery actions.
BROKEN ANALOG OUTPUT CURRENT LOOP
1. To detect a break in the analog output current loop, go to the
MONITOR AO screen.
2. If a break has occurred, check the termination unit connections
for a break.
3. Repair or replace any broken connections. If no break is evident,
refer to Section 8 for instructions on removing the circuit boards and
replace the main board.
During the start-up routine, the controller remains in bypass. The
operator has control of the analog outputs from the process display
faceplate.
ERROR MESSAGES
6-5
TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS
REFERENCE OR OVERRANGE ERROR
If an error code is displayed on the Type CTT terminal that indicates a
reference or overrange error, the analog input may be overranged. To
isolate the problem:
1. Measure the common mode voltage on each input (+/–) to earth
ground (Fig. 6-2).
AI +
TB1-2
250 Ω
AI –
TB1-3
TB2-1
DC SYSTEM
COMMON
TB3-4(
)
EARTH GROUND/
AC SAFETY GROUND
TP80435B
Figure 6-2. Checking Common Mode Voltage
2. In an ideal single point grounding system, there will be no potential difference between DC system common and earth ground.
3. The voltage between the analog input (+) and earth ground can
be between -5 V and +10 VDC or AC peak maximum.
4. The voltage between the analog input (–) and earth ground can
be between -10 V and +5 VDC or AC peak maximum.
5. If the analog input exceeds these limits, the controller is properly
sensing an overranged input. The installation must be corrected.
6. Check for single point grounding, the need for input isolators, signal wiring which is improperly routed with power wiring, inadequate
shielding, etc.
7. Function code 230, S12 = 0, will trip the controller on a reference
voltage error. The alarm summary screen will indicate bypass error
mode.
8. Refer to the status information under MONITOR in Section 5 and
reference status byte information.
REFERENCE OR OVERRANGE ERROR
6-6
SECTION 7 - PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION
WARNING
System maintenance must be performed only by qualified personnel and only after securing the equipment controlled by the
circuit. Altering or removing components from an active circuit
may upset the controlled process leading to personnel injury
and equipment damage.
AVERTISSEMENT
L’entretien du système ne doit être effectuée que par le personnel qualifié et seulement une fois que l’équipement contrôlé
par le circuit est fixé en place. La modification ou le retrait des
composants d’un circuit actif pourraient perturber le processus contrôlé et menter à des blessures au personnel et à
l’endommagement de l’équipement.
The reliability of any stand-alone product or control system is affected
by the maintenance of the equipment. ABB strongly recommends that
all equipment users practice a preventive maintenance program that
will keep the equipment operating at an optimum level.
NOTE: Maintenance personnel should be qualified electrical technicians or engineers that know the proper use of test equipment. They
should also be familiar with the Type SLC controller, have experience working with process control systems, and know what precautions to take when working on live AC systems.
USING THE LOOP BYPASS STATION
The Type CLB01 Loop Bypass Station is available as an accessory
from ABB. It is a tool for maintenance personnel that allows the interface and/or the main board to be removed for service or replacement
while maintaining direct manual control of the process. Refer to the
CLB01 Loop Bypass Station instruction for detailed information of
operation before continuing.
The following procedures outline use of the loop bypass station.
1. Transfer control to the bypass mode from the main menu.
2. Connect the loop bypass cable to connector P3 (Fig. 2-17) on the
controller termination board and transfer analog output control to the
loop bypass station.
3. Refer to Section 8 for procedures for removing the operator interface board.
INTRODUCTION
7-1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
4. Reverse these procedures to return output control to the controller.
NOTE: It is not necessary to reset the Type SLC controller when
returning from Type CLB bypass control.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Table 7-1 is the preventive maintenance schedule for the Type SLC
controller. The table lists the preventive maintenance tasks in groups
according to their specified maintenance interval. Some tasks in
Table 7-1 are self explanatory. Instruction for tasks that require further
explanation are covered under PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.
Table 7-1. Preventive Maintenance Schedule
Task
Frequency
Clean faceplate. Operating conditions may require more frequent cleaning. See procedure.
3 months
Check and tighten all wiring connections, including power and ground connections.
6 months
Check and tighten all conduit connections.
Calibrate the temperature inputs. See procedure.
Inspect circuit boards and edge connectors for contamination and clean if necessary. See
procedure.
12 months
Complete all the procedures listed in this table unless procedure lists a replacement time.
Follow timetable for replacement.
Shutdown
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
This section covers tasks from Table 7-1 that require specific instructions or further explanation:
•
•
•
Cleaning the faceplate.
Calibrating the temperature inputs.
Cleaning printed circuit boards and edge connectors.
Cleaning the Faceplate
Equipment required:
•
•
Window cleaning solution.
Soft, lint-free cloth.
1. Use a soft, lint-free cloth and gentle window cleaning solution to
clean the faceplate.
2. Spray the solution on the cloth and apply to faceplate. Do not
directly spray the faceplate area.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
7-2
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Calibrating the Temperature Inputs
Equipment required:
•
•
Thermocouples: 0 to 60 mV source, 0.01 percent accuracy.
RTDs: 300 ohm, 0.1 percent accuracy.
1. From the main menu, press s or t to highlight SETUP. Press
SEL . From the setup menu, press s or t to highlight OPTIONS.
Press SEL . From the options menu, press s or t to highlight CAL
AI3. Press SEL . If AI3 has not been set as a temperature input from
the OPTION BRD screen, the warning screen on the left will appear.
Press any key to return to the options menu. If AI3 has been selected
as a temperature input, the calibration screen on the right will appear.
Connect an external 0 to 60 mV source that has an accuracy of
0.01% and follow the instructions on the screen.
L1: MAN
L2: MAN
L1: MAN
SETUP
L2: MAN
SETUP
CONNECT
0 mV
SOURCE
BETWEEN
WARNING:
THIS AI
CHANNEL IS
NOT SET TO
A TEMP INPUT
AI3+, AI3PRESS CAL KEY
WHEN READY
PRESS ANY KEY
TO CONTINUE
ESC
PROC
DSPL
CAL
2. When the soft key below CAL is pressed, the controller will take a
reading of the 0 mV source. Once the reading is taken, the screen will
prompt to connect 60 mV between AI3+ and AI3-. Press the soft key
below CAL. Once the reading is complete, the controller will return to
the options menu. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for AI4 if required. After calibration is complete, the setup menu will appear. Press the soft key
below PROC DSPL to return to the process display.
Cleaning Printed Circuit Boards
NOTE: Before handling circuit boards, refer to SPECIAL HANDLING PROCEDURES in Section 2.
Equipment required:
•
•
•
Antistatic vacuum.
ESD field service kit.
Isopropyl alcohol, 99.5 percent electronic grade.
Refer to Section 8 for procedures to remove circuit boards.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
7-3
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Wear eye protection when using compressed air to remove
cleaning solvents. Eye injury can result from splashing solvent.
AVERTISSEMENT
Il faut porter une protectino pour les yeux pendant qu'on utilise
l'air comprimé pour enlever les solvants nettoyants. Une
éclaboussure du solvant pourrait causer une blessure aux
yeux.
If the printed circuit board needs minor cleaning, remove dust and
residue from board surfaces using clean, dry, filtered compressed air
or an antistatic field service vacuum cleaner.
Do not wash printed circuit boards.
Another method of cleaning the printed circuit board is:
1. Spray or wipe the board with isopropyl alcohol (99.5% electronic
grade). Use a foam tipped swab to wipe the circuit board.
2. When the circuit board is clean, remove excess solvent by using
compressed air to blow it free of the circuit board.
ABB does not recommend the repair of printed circuit boards in the
field. Equipment requiring repair should be returned to the factory or
the nearest ABB service center.
Cleaning Edge Connectors
Equipment required:
•
•
•
Isopropyl alcohol, 99.5 percent electronic grade.
Distilled water.
Eberhard Faber (400A) pink pearl eraser.
To clean edge connector contacts:
1. Use a solvent mixture of 80% isopropyl alcohol (99.5% electronic
grade) and 20% distilled water.
2. Soak a lint-free cloth with the solvent mixture.
3. Work the cloth back and forth parallel to the end connector contacts.
4. Repeat with a clean cloth that is soaked with the solvent mixture.
5. Dry the edge connector contact area by wiping with a clean
lint-free cloth.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
7-4
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
To clean tarnished or deeply stained edge connector contacts:
1. Use an Eberhard Faber (400A) pink pearl eraser or equivalent to
remove tarnish or stains. Fiberglass or nylon burnishing brushes may
also be used.
2. Minimize electrostatic discharge by using the 80/20 isopropyl
alcohol/water solution during burnishing.
3. Use no more than five wipes of the eraser back and forth to clean
the edge connector contacts.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
7-5
SECTION 8 - REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
INTRODUCTION
WARNING
Do not substitute components that compromise the certifications listed on the nameplate. Invalidating the certifications
can lead to unsafe conditions that can injure personnel and
damage equipment.
AVERTISSEMENT
Ne substituez pas des composantes qui pourraient annuler la
conformité aux classes figurant sur la plaque signalétique relativement aux endroits dangereux. Ceci peut entraîner des conditions dangereuses qui risquent de provoquer des blessures
et des dommages matériels.
This section provides disassembly and assembly procedures for
replacement of the faceplate/operator interface assembly, main
board, power supply board, termination board and fuse replacement.
Also included is an assembly drawing of the controller and recommended spare parts.
NOTE: Repair/replacement personnel should be qualified technicians, experienced in disassembly and assembly of electronic
equipment.
USING THE LOOP BYPASS STATION
If the operator interface board or the main board must be removed for
servicing, a Type CLB01 Loop Bypass Station is available as an
accessory. The Type CLB01 station is a maintenance tool for maintenance or repair/replacement personnel. When properly installed and
adjusted, the loop bypass station overrides two analog outputs of the
Type SLC controller and permits direct manual control of the process.
Refer to the CLB01 Loop Bypass Station instruction for detailed
information of operation before continuing.
The following procedures outline use of the loop bypass station.
1. Transfer control to the bypass mode from the main menu.
2. Connect the loop bypass cable to connector P3 (Fig. 2-17) on the
controller termination unit and transfer analog output control to the
loop bypass station.
INTRODUCTION
8-1
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
WARNING
Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched
off at the source or the area is known to be nonhazardous. Disconnecting equipment in a hazardous location with source
power on can produce an ignition capable arc that can injure
personnel and damage equipment.
AVERTISSEMENT
Ne débranchez l'équipement que si l'alimentation a été interrompue ou si l'environnement est non dangereux. Le
débranchement de l'équipement sous tension peut produire
une étincelle, ce qui peut mener à une explosion et à des
blessures au personnel.
3. Refer to the procedures for removing the operator interface
board.
NOTE: The main board and the interface board contain semiconductor devices and are subject to damage by static electricity. Refer
to SPECIAL HANDLING PROCEDURES in Section 2.
Reverse these procedures to return output control to the controller.
REPLACING THE FACEPLATE/OPERATOR INTERFACE ASSEMBLY
NOTE: When replacing any components, verify the firmware revision level. Make certain that replacement parts match firmware revision level of components being removed.
Remove power from the controller if the Type CLB01 loop bypass station is not in use.
1. Pull down on the small access door below the display area on the
controller faceplate. Loosen the captive locking screw until the faceplate and operator interface board assembly can be pulled forward.
2. Disconnect the ribbon connector between the main board and the
interface board. Remove the faceplate/operator interface assembly
from the controller housing.
3. If just replacing ROM 1 or ROM 2, refer to Figure 8-1 for the locations.
4. Assemble the new faceplate/operator interface assembly into the
controller housing. While inserting, attach the ribbon cable connector
on the new assembly to the main board.
NOTE: The contrast of the display has been preset at the factory. If
adjustment is required, refer to Section 3 and make the brightness
adjustment.
REPLACING THE FACEPLATE/OPERATOR INTERFACE ASSEMBLY
8-2
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ROM 1
ROM 2
P4
P2
XU18
XU6
P7
P6
P5
TP80538B
Figure 8-1. Location of ROMs on Operator Interface Board
REPLACING THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD
1. Remove power from the controller.
2. Loosen the captive screw and remove the faceplate/operator
interface assembly as described in Steps 1 through 3 of REPLACING
THE FACEPLATE/OPERATOR INTERFACE ASSEMBLY.
3. Loosen screw and remove the card retainer. Use the handle (pull
tab) and remove the main board from the controller housing (Fig.
8-2).
NOTE: If the controller is to be used with 220/240 VAC supply, or the
controller has to be set for single point grounding, jumpers must be
removed from the power supply board prior to entering into service.
Refer to Figure 2-4 and DC SYSTEM COMMON GROUND in
Section 2. Refer to Figure 8-3 for location of jumpers.
4. Slide the power supply board out of the housing. Note jumper settings. Set jumpers on new power supply board and slide the board
into the controller housing. Press board into position making certain
that the card edge is seated in the termination board connector.
5. Assemble the main board and the faceplate/operator interface
assembly into the controller housing. Install card retainer and tighten
screw. While inserting the operator interface assembly, reconnect the
ribbon connector. Tighten the captive locking screw under the door to
secure the faceplate assembly to the controller housing.
REPLACING THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD
8-3
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
S E R IA L IN T E R FAC E
BO ARD
N V R AM
U10, U11
U12
U 10
HA N DLE
(P U L L TA B)
U11
CARD
R E TA IN E R
FU S E F1
2 .5 -A , 2 50 V
(IN T ER N A L D C
P OW E R IN T E R R U P T )
O P T IO N B O A R D
S L C C A S E AS S E M B LY
ROM U12
T 02 24 8 A
Figure 8-2. Removing the Main Board
E4
C O N N EC T JU M P ER W 1 1 0
TO E 3 F O R 12 0 VAC O R
2 2 0/2 40 VA C. C O N N E C T
J U M P E R W 1 10 TO E 4 FO R
2 4 VD C .
W 110
E3
F 1 02
W 101
F U S E F1 0 2
2 A , 2 50 V, S L O B LO W
(D C O U T P U T)
W 106
W 1 06
S TA PL E JU M P E R
F 1 01
F U S E F1 0 1
3 A , 2 50 V
(A C L IN E )
W 101 S TA P LE J U M PE R
(C U T F O R 22 0/24 0 VAC )
T 02 1 74 A
Figure 8-3. Replacing Power Supply Board Fuses
REPLACING FUSES
1. Remove power from the controller.
2. Remove the faceplate assembly and interface board as
described in Steps 1 through 3 of REPLACING THE FACEPLATE/
OPERATOR INTERFACE ASSEMBLY.
3. Loosen screw and remove the card retainer. Use the handle (pull
tab) to remove the main board assembly from the housing (Fig. 8-2).
REPLACING FUSES
8-4
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
WARNING
Replace the fuse with one of the same type and rating. Using
an improper fuse can lead to injury to personnel and equipment damage from fire or electrical shock.
AVERTISSEMENT
Remplacer le fusible avec un fusible du même type et de la
même capacité. L’utilisation d’une fusible du mauvais type/
capacité pourrait causer des blessures au personnel et des
dommages à l’équipement résultant d’un incendie ou de choc
électrique.
4. If necessary, replace F1 on the main board (Fig. 8-2) with a 2.5 A,
250 V fuse.
5. Reach in the housing and pull the power supply board to remove.
Examine the two fuses, F101 and F102 (Fig. 8-3) on the power supply board.
6. If necessary, replace F101 with a 3 A, 250 V fuse or F102 with a 2
A (slo blow), 250 V fuse. Slide the power supply board into the housing and make certain it is firmly seated in the termination board connector.
7. Slide the main board assembly back into the housing. Make certain it is firmly seated in the termination board connector. Install card
retainer and tighten screw.
8. Connect the ribbon cable connector from the main board to the
faceplate/operator interface assembly and slide the interface board
into the housing.
9. Tighten the captive locking screw.
REPLACING THE MAIN, OPTION AND SERIAL INTERFACE BOARDS
NOTE: When replacing any component, verify the firmware revision
level. Make certain that replacement parts match the firmware revision level of the component being removed.
1. Remove power from the controller if not using the Type CLB01
loop bypass station.
2. Remove the faceplate assembly and interface board as
described in Steps 1 through 3 of REPLACING THE FACEPLATE/
OPERATOR INTERFACE ASSEMBLY.
REPLACING THE MAIN, OPTION AND SERIAL INTERFACE BOARDS
8-5
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
3. Loosen screw and remove the card retainer. Using the handle
(pull tab), remove the main board from the controller housing (Fig.
8-2).
NOTES:
1. The NVRAM (Fig. 8-2) from the faulty main board can be
removed and installed on the new main board. This eliminates the
need to configure the new board, providing main board failure is not
due to or has not caused NVRAM corruption. If the NVRAM is
replaced, refer to Ambient Temperature in Section 3 and enter the
ambient temperature at the wiring terminals.
2. If necessary to replace ROM U12, refer to Figure 8-2 for the
location.
4. To replace the option board, remove it from the main board connector P6. Set all jumpers on the new option board to the same positions as on the old option board (Appendix D). Seat the new option
board in the main board connector P6.
5. To replace the serial interface board, remove it from the main
board connectors P7 and P8. Set all jumpers on the new serial interface board to the same positions as on the old serial interface board
(Appendix D). Seat the new serial interface board in the main board
connectors P7 and P8.
6. Assemble by reversing Steps 2 and 3.
7. Replacement of the main board requires entering the ambient
temperature at the wiring terminals (refer to OPTIONS in Section 3).
REPLACING THE TERMINATION BOARD
1. Remove power from the controller.
2. Remove the plug-in connectors from the termination board at terminal blocks TB1, TB2, TB3 and TB4.
3. Remove the faceplate assembly and interface board as
described in Steps 1 through 3 of REPLACING THE FACEPLATE/
OPERATOR INTERFACE ASSEMBLY.
4. Remove the power supply board and the main board from the
controller housing (refer to REPLACING THE POWER SUPPLY
BOARD).
5. Remove the four screws securing the termination board to the
controller housing. Note the S1 switch settings before discarding the
board.
6. Install new termination board in rear of controller housing. Insert
four screws and tighten. Set switch S1 on the new board. If necessary, refer to Table 0-1.
REPLACING THE TERMINATION BOARD
8-6
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
7. Install the power supply board and then the main board into the
housing and gently push in position until the card edge of each board
is firmly seated in the termination board connector. Install the card
retainer and tighten the screw.
8. Assemble the main board ribbon connector to the interface
board. Insert the faceplate/operator interface assembly into the controller housing. Tighten the captive locking screw.
9. Install the plug-in connectors onto TB1, TB2, TB3 and TB4 of the
termination board.
10. Replacement of the termination unit requires entering the ambient temperature at the wiring terminals (refer to OPTIONS in
Section 3).
PARTS LIST
ABB is ready to assist in the use and repair of its products at any time.
Requests should be made to the nearest sales or service office. Table
8-1 is the parts list for Figure 8-4.
Table 8-1. Parts List (Figure 8-4)
Item
Part No.
Description
1
6643189_1
Faceplate and operator interface PCB assembly1
2
6643044_1
Main PCB assembly1
3
1948118_1
Power supply PCB assembly
4
6640350_1
Case assembly
5
6643149_1
Termination unit PCB assembly
6
6636612_1
Rear cover for standard unit - SLC_2_0
6636612_2
Rear cover for CE Mark unit - SLC_2_A
7
6640713_2
Wiring label
8
MP405-789
Rear cover label
9
5311428-10
O-ring
10
6636615_1
Slide nut, 2 required
11
1963660_1_
Nameplate
12
MP295-1087
Caution label
13
6640375_1
Bracket assembly
14
6637171_2
Cable assembly
15
6636733_2
Card guide, 2 required
16
1951781_1
Panel gasket
17
1964053_1
Service legend, 3 required
18
6640367_1
Optional temperature/frequency input board:
SLC02 – omit
SLC22 – 1 required
19
6643046_1
Serial interface board:
SLC_20 – omit
SLC_21 – 1 required
PARTS LIST
8-7
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
Table 8-1. Parts List (Figure 8-4) (continued)
Item
Part No.
Description
20
—
CSA Label
21
NBZHA16006
0.190-32 pan head screw
22
NIDAC09004
0.112-40 × 0.250 slotted pan head machine screw,
sems external, 4 required
23
NBTHA23040
0.312-18 × 0.250 slotted fillister head machine
screw
24
NPMGA08010
Rivet
25
6641189_1
Spring spacer
27
6641379_1
Card retainer
28
341816_5118
O-ring
29
NIGAC09006
0.112-40 external sems screw
30
MP385-287
Cont envir label
31
6643163_1
AC line filter
SLC_2_0 – omit
SLC_2_A – 1 required
NOTE:
1. Specify firmware level of board being replaced.
24
16
15
13
14
19
12
11
20
10
23
22
9
17
21
31
7
1
8
S
E
L
6
A
/
M
27 28 29
18
25
Figure 8-4. Parts Drawing
PARTS LIST
8-8
30
2
3
4
5
T02240A
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
REPLACEMENT PARTS AVAILABLE
Table 8-2. Recommended Spare Parts
Item1
Part No.
Description
1
663189_1
Faceplate and operator interface PCB
assembly
Note 2
6639055_2
Faceplate assembly only
2
6643044_1
Main PCB assembly
3
1948118_1
Power supply PCB assembly
5
6643149_1
Termination unit PCB assembly
Note 3
1946987_1
Cold junction compensator
18
6640367_1
Optional temperature/frequency input board
19
6643046_1
Serial interface board
1948182_23001
Fuse, 3 A, fast acting, 250 V (F101) AC line
1948182_32001
Fuse, 2 A, slo blow, 250 V (F102) DC output
Note 5
1948266_25
Fuse, 2.5 A, 250 V (F1) internal DC power
interrupt
N/A
6643192_1
Serial interface adapter
Note 4
NOTES:
1. Refer to Figure 8-4 for item no.
2. Faceplate assembly part of item 1 assembly.
3. CJC part of item 5 assembly.
4. Fuses located on power supply board (item 3).
5. Fuse located on main board (item 2).
REPLACEMENT PARTS AVAILABLE
8-9
APPENDIX A - CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
INTRODUCTION
The following information provides a brief description of the six predefined factory configurations.
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
Figures A-1 through A-11 show how the predefined factory configurations
are organized and what the supporting function codes are.
Single Loop PID with Internal Set Point
This configuration is a single analog input, single analog output, PID controller (Fig. A-1). HI/LO alarm digital outputs are provided for the analog
input process variable in the loop. The PV HI/LO alarm menu is used to
(50)
60
ON/OFF
S1
S2
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
SLC I/O
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
50
51
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
RCJ
(182)
mV
52
ST
53
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
RCJ
(182)
mV
54
ST
55
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S13
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
AI 3
AI 3
AI 4
AI 4
AO 1
AO 1
AO 2
AO 2
DO 1
DI 1
DO 2
DI 2
DO 3
DI 3
DO 4
DO 1
PI 1
DO 2
SPARE DO 3
DO 4
PI
STAT
N/A
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
N/A
mV
RCJ
(230)
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
S1
S2
S3
S4
(31)
120
TSTQ
S1
S2
S3
S4
S1
S2
S3
S4
S2
S1
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
(182)
SP
CO
PV
BI
TR
BD
TF
(156)
300
301
302
R
FF
N/A
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
II
DI
(12)
240
241
S1
ASCII
STDESC
(113)
1022
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
N/A
H//L
L
(40)
200
(31)
130
TSTQ
APID
56
ST
57
H
OR
M/A
MFC/P
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
S1
A (37)
N 220
D
S1
ASCII
STDESC
(113)
1021
PV
SP
SP
O
A
A
TR
C/R
TS
C
MI
C-F
AX
(80)
351
350
352
354
353
355
M/A SLC
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
C/R
LX
CX
HAA
LAA
HDA
LDA
AO
TRS2
TRPV
T
S1
ASCII
STDESC
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
GPA 1
SL1
GPA 2
SL2
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
ALM 1 A/M 1
ALM 2 A/M 2
ASCII
A/M 3
OP 1
A/M 4
OP 2
N/A
OP 3
N/A
(231)
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
OP 4
(113)
1020
TP80449B
Figure A-1. Single Loop Control, Internal Set Point
INTRODUCTION
A-1
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
set each alarm limit. The analog input is AI1; the analog output is AO1.
Replacing AI1 with one temperature input requires a modified configuration. Figure A-2 represents the configuration using AI3 as a single temperature analog input. Note that the option card is required, and the
temperature
input
type
must
be
selected
from
the
SETUP-OPTIONS-OPTION BOARD menu. The single loop PID configuration is applicable to any control task having a single input and the process variable, and requiring a single analog output. The set point is
manipulated from the faceplate on the process display screen.
(50)
60
ON/OFF
S1
S2
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
SLC I/O
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
50
51
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
RCJ
(182)
mV
52
ST
53
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
RCJ
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S13
(182)
mV
54
ST
55
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
AI 3
AI 3
AI 4
AI 4
AO 1
AO 1
AO 2
AO 2
DO 1
DI 1
DO 2
DI 2
DO 3
DI 3
DO 4
DO 1
PI 1
DO 2
SPARE DO 3
DO 4
PI
STAT
N/A
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
N/A
mV
RCJ
S1
S2
S3
S4
(31)
120
TSTQ
(230)
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
S1
S2
S3
S4
S1
S2
S3
S4
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
(182)
SP
CO
PV
BI
TR
BD
TF
(156)
300
301
302
R
FF
N/A
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
II
DI
(12)
240
241
S1
ASCII
STDESC
(113)
1022
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
N/A
H//L
L
(40)
200
(31)
130
TSTQ
APID
S2
S1
56
ST
57
H
OR
M/A
MFC/P
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
S1
A (37)
N 220
D
S1
ASCII
STDESC
(113)
1021
PV
SP
SP
O
A
A
TR
C/R
TS
C
MI
C-F
AX
(80)
351
350
352
354
353
355
M/A SLC
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
C/R
LX
CX
HAA
LAA
HDA
LDA
AO
TRS2
TRPV
T
S1
ASCII
STDESC
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
GPA 1
SL1
GPA 2
SL2
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
ALM 1 A/M 1
ALM 2 A/M 2
ASCII
A/M 3
OP 1
A/M 4
OP 2
N/A
OP 3
N/A
(231)
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
OP 4
(113)
1020
TP80450C
Figure A-2. Single Loop Control, Internal Set Point, with Temperature Input
Single Loop PID with External Set Point
This configuration is a two analog input, single analog output, PID
controller (Fig. A-3). The process variable is associated with AI1,
external set point with AI2, and analog output with AO1. The process
variable and external set point are set to the same zero and span values. When the option card is installed and the temperature inputs are
configured in the SETUP- OPTIONS-OPTION BOARD menu, the
process variable is associated with AO3 and external set point is
associated with AI4. The analog output remains AO1. Figure A-4 represents this two temperature input configuration.
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A-2
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
The single loop PID configuration is applicable to any control task
having a single process variable input and supervisory set point input,
and requiring a single analog output. Select either the external set
point input or the faceplate set point as the input to the PID controller.
Both analog inputs have HI/LO alarm digital outputs associated with
them. The PV HI/LO alarm menu sets both alarm limits.
(50)
60
ON/OFF
S1
S2
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
50
51
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
(182)
mV
52
PA
RCJ
ST
53
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
S1
AI 1
AI 1
S2
S3
AI 2
AI 2
AI 3
AI 3
S4
S5
AI 4
AI 4
AO 1
AO 1
S6
S7
AO 2
AO 2
DO 1
DI 1
S8
S9
DO 2
DI 2
DO 3
DI 3
S10
S11
DO 4
DO 1
PI 1
DO 2
S13
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
54
55
SPARE DO 3
DO 4
PI
STAT
N/A
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
S1
SLC I/O
PA
N/A
(31)
130
TSTQ
S3
S4
(230)
100
101
S2
S3
(31)
TSTQ
120
S4
102
103
S1
104
105
S2
S3
106
107
S4
108
109
S1
110
111
S3
S4
S3
RCJ
ST
S4
(31)
170
TSTQ
113
114
115
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
116
M/A
MFC/P
57
S1
S2
APID
H//L
(12)
H
240
241
SP
S1
S3
PV
S4
S5
TF
S6
S7
FF
S8
S9
N/A
S10
TR
(156)
CO
300
BI
BD
301
302
R
S3
S4
DI
L
(12)
250
251
S1
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1022
ASCII
STDESC
O
A
A
C/R
TS
C
S19
S20
AX
S26
H
SP
SP
TR
S22
S24
S25
II
PV
S5
S18
S21
N/A
H//L
S1
A (37)
N 220
D
112
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
L
S1
S2
(40)
200
160
S2
S2
S1
OR
(31)
TSTQ
(182)
mV
56
PA
S1
S2
C-F
350
352
354
353
355
C/R
LX
CX
HAA
LAA
HDA
S27
S28
LDA
S29
S30
TRS2
(113) S1
1021
(80)
351
AO
TRPV
M/A SLC
S1
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
S3
S4
GPA 1
SL1
GPA 2
SL2
S5
S6
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
S7
S8
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
S9
S10
ALM 1
A/M 1
ALM 2
A/M 2
S11
S12
ASCII
A/M 3
OP 1
A/M 4
S13
S14
OP 2
N/A
OP 3
N/A
S2
S15
OP 4
(231)
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
T
ASCII
STDESC
(113)
1020
TP80451C
Figure A-3. Single Loop Control, External Set Point
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A-3
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
(50)
60
ON/OFF
S1
S2
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
50
51
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
(182)
mV
52
PA
RCJ
ST
53
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
RCJ
S1
S2
S3
ST
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
AI 3
AI 3
S4
S5
AI 4
AI 4
AO 1
AO 1
S6
S7
AO 2
AO 2
DO 1
DI 1
S8
S9
DO 2
DI 2
DO 3
DI 3
S10
S11
DO 4
DO 1
PI 1
DO 2
S13
(182)
mV
54
PA
SPARE DO 3
DO 4
PI
55
STAT
N/A
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
S1
SLC I/O
PA
N/A
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(230)
100
101
S2
S3
102
103
S1
104
105
S2
S3
106
107
S4
108
109
S1
110
111
120
S3
S4
S1
S2
S3
S4
160
(31)
170
TSTQ
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
115
116
M/A
MFC/P
(182)
56
57
S1
S2
APID
241
SP
CO
S1
S3
PV
BI
TR
BD
S4
S5
TF
S6
S7
FF
S8
S9
N/A
S10
TR
C/R
S5
S18
TS
C
S19
S20
AX
302
R
S21
N/A
S22
S24
S25
II
DI
251
(113) S1
1022
O
301
(12)
250
ASCII
STDESC
SP
SP
S3
S4
S26
S1
PV
(156)
300
H//L
L
A (37)
N 220
D
113
114
(12)
H
240
H
S1
S2
(40)
200
112
H//L
S1
OR
(31)
TSTQ
S2
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
L
(31)
TSTQ
S4
S2
S1
(31)
130
TSTQ
S3
S4
ASCII
STDESC
C-F
350
352
354
353
355
C/R
LX
CX
HAA
LAA
HDA
S27
S28
LDA
S29
S30
TRS2
(113) S1
1021
A
A
(80)
351
AO
TRPV
M/A SLC
S1
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
S3
S4
GPA 1
SL1
GPA 2
SL2
S5
S6
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
S7
S8
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
S9
S10
ALM 1
A/M 1
ALM 2
A/M 2
S11
S12
ASCII
A/M 3
OP 1
A/M 4
S13
S14
OP 2
N/A
OP 3
N/A
S2
S15
OP 4
(231)
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
T
ASCII
STDESC
(113)
1020
TP80452C
Figure A-4. Single Loop Control, External Set Point, with Two Temperature Inputs
Dual Loop Controller with Internal Set Point
This configuration contains two separate and independent single loop
controller configurations (Fig. A-5). Each configuration is a single
analog input, single analog output, PID controller. HI/LO alarm digital
outputs are provided for the analog input process variable in each
loop. The PV HI/LO alarm menu is used to set each alarm limit. For
loop 1, the analog input is AI1 and the analog output is AO1. For loop
2, the analog input is AI2 and the analog output is AO2.
When two temperature inputs are required, the option card must be
installed and the temperature input type selected from the
SETUP-OPTIONS-OPTION BOARD menu. The high level AI1 is
replaced by AI3 as the loop 1 process variable temperature input. In
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A-4
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
loop 2, AI4 replaces AI2 as the process variable temperature input.
Figure A-6 represents the configuration using AI3 and AI4 as the process variable temperature inputs.
This configuration can be applied to any process having two controllable process variables and requiring two analog outputs.
S1
S2
S3
(31)
120
TSTQ
S4
S1
S2
S3
S1
OR
(40)
200
S4
S2
(31)
130
TSTQ
S3
S4
M/A
MFC/P
S1
S2
S3
APID
S2
S1
S3
S4
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
SLC I/O
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
50
S1
51
S3
S4
S5
S6
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
(182)
mV
52
PA
RCJ
ST
53
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
54
55
S2
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
AI 3
AI 3
AI 4
AI 4
AO 1
AO 1
AO 2
AO 2
S7
S8
DO 1
DI 1
DO 2
DI 2
S9
S10
DO 3
DI 3
S11
S13
PI 1
DO 4
AI/DEF
CBC
PA
RCJ
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
CONTROL OUTPUT 2
H//L
S1
H
L
(12)
103
104
PV
TR
BD
TF
302
S1
S2
S5
S6
R
S7
S8
N/A
S9
S10
II
A (37)
N 220
D
FF
N/A
DI
L
C
MI
C-F
S20
S21
C/R
S22
S24
CX
S25
S26
LAA
106
107
S30
AX
PI
STAT
(80)
351
350
352
354
353
355
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
LX
HAA
M/A SLC
HDA
S1
LDA
S2
AO
TRS2
TRPV
T
S23 = 0
112
113
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
S3
S4
GPA 1
SL1
GPA 2
SL2
S5
S6
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
S7
S8
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
S9
ALM 1
A/M 1
S10
S11
ALM 2
A/M 2
ASCII
A/M 3
(80)
451
S12
S13
OP 1
A/M 4
OP 2
N/A
450
452
S14
S15
OP 3
N/A
M/A
MFC/P
114
115
116
APID
S2
SP
CO
S1
S3
PV
BI
TR
BD
S4
S5
TF
S6
S7
FF
S8
S9
N/A
S10
(156)
400
401
402
S1
S2
R
A (37)
N 230
D
S1
S2
PV
SP
SP
O
S3
S4
A
S5
S18
TS
S19
S20
AX
S21
N/A
S22
S24
S25
II
DI
S26
240
241
(50)
60
H//L
H
TS
S18
S19
110
SPARE DO 3
111
DO 4
A
A
C/R
S28
S29
ON/OFF
S1
O
TR
S27
(50)
60
SP
SP
S4
S5
105
ON/OFF
PV
DO 2
N/A
(182)
mV
56
ST
57
101
102
SP
108
DO 1
109
N/A
S9
S10
(230)
100
(156)
CO
300
BI
301
A
TR
C/R
C
C-F
OP 4
(231)
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
454
453
CONTROL OUTPUT 2
455
C/R
LX
CX
HAA
LAA
HDA
S27
S28
LDA
S29
S30
TRS2
AO
TRPV
(12)
250
T
S23 = 0
251
S1
S2
S3
TSTQ
(31)
160
S4
S1
S2
S1
S3
S4
S2
S3
S4
TSTQ
S1
ASCII
STDESC
OR
(40)
210
(31)
170
(113) S1
1022
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1021
ASCII
STDESC
(113)
1020
TP80453C
Figure A-5. Dual Loop Control, Internal Set Point
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A-5
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
S1
S2
S3
(31)
120
TSTQ
S4
S1
S2
S3
S1
OR
(40)
200
S4
S2
(31)
130
TSTQ
S3
S4
M/A
MFC/P
S1
S2
S3
APID
S2
S1
S3
S4
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
SLC I/O
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
50
S1
51
S3
S4
S5
S6
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
(182)
mV
52
PA
RCJ
ST
53
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
54
S2
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
AI 3
AI 3
AI 4
AI 4
AO 1
AO 1
AO 2
AO 2
S7
S8
DO 1
DI 1
DO 2
DI 2
S9
S10
DO 3
DI 3
S11
S13
PI 1
DO 4
101
102
103
104
S1
S2
S5
S6
R
S7
S8
N/A
S9
S10
II
A (37)
N 220
D
FF
N/A
DI
ON/OFF
DO 4
PI
55
STAT
(50)
60
MI
C-F
S20
S21
C/R
S22
S24
CX
S25
S26
LAA
S30
AX
352
354
353
355
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
LX
HAA
M/A SLC
HDA
S1
LDA
S2
AO
TRS2
TRPV
T
116
APID
S2
SP
CO
S1
S3
PV
BI
TR
BD
S4
S5
TF
S6
S7
FF
S8
S9
N/A
S10
(12)
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
S3
S4
GPA 1
SL1
GPA 2
SL2
S5
S6
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
S7
S8
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
S9
ALM 1
A/M 1
S10
S11
ALM 2
A/M 2
ASCII
A/M 3
(80)
451
S12
S13
OP 1
A/M 4
OP 2
N/A
450
452
S14
S15
OP 3
N/A
M/A
MFC/P
114
115
(156)
400
401
402
S1
S2
R
A (37)
N 230
D
S1
S2
PV
SP
SP
O
S3
S4
A
S5
S18
TS
S19
S20
AX
S21
N/A
S22
S24
S25
II
DI
S26
240
241
(50)
70
H//L
L
C
350
112
113
ON/OFF
H
TS
S18
S19
106
107
H//L
S1
C/R
S28
S29
CONTROL OUTPUT 2
L
TF
302
A
A
(80)
351
DO 2
N/A
H
BD
O
TR
S27
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
S1
TR
SP
SP
S4
S5
105
(182)
mV
56
ST
57
RCJ
PV
PV
110
SPARE DO 3
111
AI/DEF
CBC
PA
SP
108
DO 1
109
N/A
S9
S10
(230)
100
(156)
CO
300
BI
301
TR
A
C/R
C
C-F
OP 4
(231)
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
454
453
CONTROL OUTPUT 2
455
C/R
LX
CX
HAA
LAA
HDA
S27
S28
LDA
S29
S30
TRS2
AO
TRPV
T
(12)
250
251
S1
S2
S3
TSTQ
(31)
160
S4
S1
S2
S1
S3
S4
S2
S3
S4
TSTQ
S1
ASCII
STDESC
OR
(40)
210
(31)
170
(113) S1
1022
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1021
ASCII
STDESC
(113)
1020
TP80455B
Figure A-6. Dual Loop Control, Internal Set Points, Two Temperature Inputs
Dual Loop Controller with External Set Point
This configuration contains two separate and independent single loop
configurations (Fig. A-7). Each configuration is a two analog input, single analog output, PID controller. HI/LO alarm digital outputs are also
provided for the analog input process variable in each loop. The PV
HI/LO alarm menu is used to set each alarm limit. For loop 1, the analog input is AI1 and the external set point is AI2. The control output is
AO1. For loop 2, the process variable is AI3 and the external set point
is AI4. The control output is AO2. When two temperature inputs are
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A-6
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
required, the option card must be installed, and the temperature input
type selected from the SETUP-OPTIONS-OPTION BOARD menu.
These temperature inputs only affect loop 2. AI3 and AI4 are reconfigured as temperature inputs in S1 and S2 of function code 182 at block
numbers 54 and 56, respectively.
The dual loop configuration can be applied to any process having two
controllable process variable inputs and two external supervisory set
point inputs, and requiring two analog outputs.
S1
S2
S3
(31)
120
TSTQ
S4
S1
S2
S3
S1
OR
(40)
200
S4
S2
(31)
130
TSTQ
S3
S4
M/A
MFC/P
S1
S2
S3
APID
S2
S1
S3
S4
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
SLC I/O
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
50
S1
51
S3
S4
S5
S6
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
(182)
mV
52
PA
RCJ
ST
53
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
S2
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
54
55
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
AI 3
AI 3
AI 4
AI 4
AO 1
AO 2
S7
S8
DO 1
S9
S10
DO 3
S11
S13
PI 1
DO 2
DO 4
S9
S10
AO 2
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
56
57
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
CONTROL OUTPUT 2
H//L
S1
H
L
(12)
SP
PV
TR
BD
TF
302
S1
S2
S5
S6
R
S7
S8
N/A
S9
S10
II
A (37)
N 220
D
FF
N/A
DI
ON/OFF
(50)
60
L
C
S18
S19
MI
C-F
S20
S21
C/R
S22
S24
CX
S25
S26
LAA
S30
AX
DO 4
PI
STAT
(80)
351
350
352
354
353
355
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
LX
HAA
M/A SLC
HDA
S1
LDA
S2
AO
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
TRS2
TRPV
T
S23 = 0
110
SPARE DO 3
111
112
113
S9
116
APID
S2
SP
CO
S1
S3
PV
BI
TR
BD
S4
S5
TF
S6
S7
FF
S8
S9
N/A
S10
(156)
400
401
402
S1
S2
R
A (37)
N 230
D
S1
S2
PV
S3
S4
A
S5
S18
TS
S19
S20
AX
SP
S22
S24
S25
II
DI
S26
240
241
(50)
70
O
A
TR
S21
N/A
SP
C/R
C
C-F
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
GPA 1
SL1
GPA 2
SL2
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
ALM 1
A/M 1
S10
S11
ALM 2
A/M 2
ASCII
A/M 3
(80)
451
S12
S13
OP 1
A/M 4
OP 2
N/A
450
452
S14
S15
OP 3
N/A
M/A
MFC/P
114
115
H//L
H
TS
DO 2
ON/OFF
S1
A
C/R
S28
S29
108
DO 1
109
O
TR
106
DI 2
107
DI 3
SP
SP
A
S27
DI 1
PV
S4
S5
105
N/A
PA
101
102
103
AO 1
104
N/A
AI/DEF
CBC
(230)
100
(156)
CO
300
BI
301
OP 4
(231)
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
454
453
CONTROL OUTPUT 2
455
C/R
LX
CX
HAA
LAA
HDA
S27
S28
LDA
S29
S30
TRS2
AO
TRPV
(12)
250
T
S23 = 0
251
S1
S2
S3
TSTQ
(31)
160
S4
S1
S2
S3
S1
S2
S3
S4
TSTQ
S1
ASCII
STDESC
(31)
170
(113) S1
1022
OR
(40)
210
S4
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1021
ASCII
STDESC
(113)
1020
TP80454B
Figure A-7. Dual Loop Control, External Set Points (with or without Temperature Inputs)
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A-7
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
Cascade Control
This configuration is a two analog input, single analog output, two PID
controller (Fig. A-8). Both analog inputs have HI/LO alarms digital outputs associated with them. The PV HI/LO alarm menu is used to set
each alarm limit. The primary PID controller is tuned as loop 1; the
secondary PID controller is tuned as loop 2.
A cascade controller is applicable to a process with an intermediate
variable that affects the controlled variable. The controller requires a
primary and secondary analog input and provides a single analog
S1
S2
S3
TSTQ
(31)
120
TSTQ
(31)
130
S4
S1
S2
S3
S4
M/A
MFC/P
S1
APID
S2
S1
S3
S4
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
50
51
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
52
53
S10
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S2
S3
S4
S5
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S1
S13
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
54
AI 1
AI 2
AI 3
AI 4
AO 1
AO 2
DO 1
DO 2
DO 3
DO 4
PI 1
55
RCJ
ST
57
CONTROL OUTPUT 2
H//L
S1
H
L
TR
TF
AI 1
S7
S8
N/A
AI 3
S9
S10
II
(230)
100
AI 2
101
102
AI 4
103
AO 1
FF
N/A
DI
DI 1
L
S4
S5
TR
C/R
TS
C
C-F
AX
C/R
S22
S24
CX
S25
S26
LAA
S28
S29
108
DO 1
109
S30
DI 3
A
A
S20
S21
106
DI 2
107
DO 4
PI
STAT
(12)
(80)
351
350
352
354
353
355
CONTROL OUTPUT 2
LX
HAA
M/A SLC
HDA
S1
LDA
S2
AO
TRS2
TRPV
T
S23 = 0
DO 2
112
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
S3
S4
GPA 1
SL1
GPA 2
SL2
S5
S6
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
S7
S8
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
S9
113
114
ALM 1
A/M 1
S10
S11
ALM 2
A/M 2
ASCII
A/M 3
(80)
451
S12
S13
OP 1
A/M 4
OP 2
N/A
450
452
S14
S15
OP 3
N/A
M/A
MFC/P
115
116
APID
S2
(156)
400
BI
401
BD
402
CO
SP
S1
S3
PV
S4
S5
TF
S6
S7
FF
S8
S9
N/A
S10
TR
S1
S2
PV
SP
SP
O
S3
S4
A
A
S5
S18
S19
S20
R
S21
N/A
S22
S24
S25
II
DI
S26
240
241
(50)
70
H//L
H
O
S27
ON/OFF
S1
SP
SP
S18
S19
104
AO 2
105
N/A
(182)
mV
56
PA
301
BD
302
PV
S2
S3
110
SPARE DO 3
111
AI/DEF
CBC
S10
BI
PV
R
N/A
S9
SP
S5
S6
SLC I/O
PA
(156)
CO
300
TR
C/R
C
TS
C-F
AX
OP 4
(231)
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
454
453
455
C/R
LX
CX
HAA
LAA
HDA
S27
S28
LDA
S29
S30
TRS2
AO
TRPV
(12)
T
S23 = 0
250
251
S1
S2
S3
TSTQ
(31)
160
S4
S1
S2
S1
S3
S4
S2
S3
S4
TSTQ
S1
ASCII
STDESC
S1
OR
(40)
210
S2
A (37)
N 230
D
(31)
170
(113) S1
1022
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1021
ASCII
STDESC
(113)
1020
TP80457B
Figure A-8. Cascade Control
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A-8
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
output. The primary process variable is AI1 and the secondary process variable is AI2. The output of the primary PID controller
becomes the set point for the secondary PID controller. The output of
the secondary control loop is AO2.
When two temperature inputs are required, the option card must be
installed and the temperature input type selected from the
SETUP-OPTIONS-OPTION BOARD menu. The primary temperature
input becomes AI3 and AI4 is the secondary temperature input. This
configuration is shown in Figure A-9.
S1
S2
S3
(31)
120
TSTQ
S4
S1
S2
S3
S1
OR
(40)
200
S4
S2
S3
(31)
130
TSTQ
S4
M/A
MFC/P
S1
APID
S2
S1
S3
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
SLC I/O
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
50
51
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
52
53
S10
PA
S8
S9
S13
mV
RCJ
S6
S7
S10
S11
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S2
S3
S4
S5
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S1
ST
(182)
54
55
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
AI 3
AI 3
AI 4
AO 1
AO 2
DO 1
DO 2
DO 3
DO 4
PI 1
SPARE
102
AI 4
103
AI/DEF
CBC
S10
PA
RCJ
ST
57
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
CONTROL OUTPUT 2
H//L
S1
H
L
(12)
PV
TR
BD
TF
302
S1
S2
R
A (37)
N 220
D
FF
N/A
S9
S10
II
N/A
DI
106
DI 2
107
ON/OFF
DI 3
108
DO 1
109
DO 3
DO 4
PI
STAT
L
A
A
S4
S5
TR
C/R
TS
C
(50)
60
C-F
AX
S20
S21
C/R
S22
S24
CX
S25
S26
LAA
S28
S29
S30
(80)
351
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
350
352
354
353
355
LX
HAA
M/A SLC
HDA
S1
LDA
S2
AO
TRS2
TRPV
T
S23 = 0
112
113
114
115
116
S1
S2
APID
S2
(156)
400
401
BD
402
SP
CO
S1
S3
PV
BI
S4
S5
TF
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
TR
S3
S4
S1
S2
R
A (37)
N 230
D
FF
N/A
II
DI
(50)
60
O
A
A
TR
TS
S19
S20
AX
S26
240
241
SP
SP
S5
S18
S21
S22
S24
S25
N/A
PV
C/R
C
C-F
(80)
451
450
452
ALM
ACK
S5
S6
GPA 3
S7
S8
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
ALM 1
A/M 1
ALM 2
A/M 2
ASCII
A/M 3
OP 1
A/M 4
OP 2
N/A
OP 3
N/A
S14
S15
GPA 2
GPA 4
OP 4
(231)
900
901
902
903
SW1
904
GPA 1
S10
S11
S12
S13
M/A
MFC/P
M/A 1
M/A 2
S3
S4
S9
H//L
H
O
110
111
ON/OFF
S1
SP
SP
S27
DI 1
DO 2
PV
S2
S3
S18
S19
104
AO 2
105
N/A
(182)
mV
56
SP
S7
S8
AO 1
N/A
S9
(230)
100
101
S4
S5
S6
(156)
CO
300
BI
301
SL1
SL2
SW2
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
454
453
CONTROL OUTPUT 2
455
C/R
LX
CX
HAA
LAA
HDA
S27
S28
LDA
S29
S30
TRS2
AO
TRPV
(12)
T
S23 = 0
250
251
S1
S2
S3
TSTQ
(31)
160
S4
S1
S2
S3
S4
S1
S2
S3
S4
TSTQ
S1
ASCII
STDESC
OR
(40)
210
(31)
170
(113) S1
1022
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1021
ASCII
STDESC
(113)
1020
TP80456C
Figure A-9. Cascade Control with Two Temperature Inputs
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A-9
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
Ratio Controller
This configuration is a two analog input, single analog output, single
PID controller (Fig. A-10). The control variable is AI1, the wild variable
is AI2 and the analog output is AO1. Both analog inputs have HI/LO
alarm digital outputs associated with them. The PV HI/LO alarms
menu is used to set both alarm limits.
When two temperature inputs are required, the option card must be
installed and the temperature input type selected from the
SETUP-OPTIONS-OPTION BOARD menu. The control variable is
associated with AI3 and the wild variable is associated with AI4. The
(50)
60
ON/OFF
S1
S2
S3
S4
TSTQ
(31)
120
TSTQ
(31)
130
S1
S2
S3
S4
S1
S2
S1
S3
S4
S2
(40)
210
S2
A (37)
N 220
D
(31)
160
TSTQ
S3
S1
OR
S4
S1
S2
S3
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
S10
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
50
S1
51
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
S3
S4
AI 3
AI 3
AI 4
AI 4
S5
S6
AO 1
AO 1
AO 2
AO 2
S2
S7
S8
DO 1
53
DO 2
DI 2
S9
S10
DO 3
DI 3
DO 4
DO 1
S11
S13
PI 1
DO 2
SPARE
DO 3
(182)
54
55
DO 4
PI
STAT
N/A
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
N/A
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
M/A
MFC/P
(230)
100
S1
101
102
S2
APID
S2
103
104
S1
S3
105
DI 1
106
(182)
52
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
170
SLC I/O
PA
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
(31)
TSTQ
S4
S4
S5
107
SP
CO
PV
BI
TR
BD
R
FF
N/A
111
S8
S9
112
S10
109
110
S3
S4
S5
S18
S19
TF
S6
S7
108
(156)
N/A
II
DI
S20
S21
S22
S24
S25
PV
SP
SP
O
TR
C/R
TS
C
C-F
AX
352
354
353
M/A SLC
355
S1
CX
HAA
LAA
S26
S27
S28
LDA
S29
S30
TRS2
HDA
AO
TRPV
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
S3
S4
GPA 1
SL1
GPA 2
SL2
S5
S6
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
S7
S8
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
S9
S10
ALM 1
A/M 1
ALM 2
A/M 2
S11
S12
ASCII
A/M 3
OP 1
A/M 4
S13
S14
OP 2
N/A
OP 3
N/A
S2
LX
114
(182)
56
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
350
C/R
113
115
116
A
A
(80)
351
T
57
S15
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
S1
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1022
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1021
ASCII
STDESC
OP 4
(231)
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
(113)
1020
H//L
S1
H
L
(12)
240
241
H//L
S1
H
L
(12)
250
251
TP80458B
Figure A-10. Ratio Control
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A - 10
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
analog output remains AO1. Figure A-11 represents this two temperature input configuration.
The ratio control configuration is applicable to any control task having
two inputs, one of which must be maintained in a constant proportion
to the other, and requiring a single analog output. Ratio multipliers
can range from 0.01 to 10.0.
(50)
60
ON/OFF
S1
S2
S3
S4
TSTQ
(31)
120
TSTQ
(31)
130
S1
S2
S3
S4
S1
S2
S1
S3
S4
S2
(40)
210
S2
A (37)
N 220
D
(31)
160
TSTQ
S3
S1
OR
S4
S1
S2
S3
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
50
51
S10
(182)
mV
52
PA
RCJ
ST
53
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
54
55
S1
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
S3
S4
AI 3
AI 3
AI 4
AI 4
S5
S6
AO 1
AO 1
AO 2
AO 2
S2
AI/DEF
CBC
S7
S8
DO 1
DO 2
DI 2
S9
S10
DO 3
DI 3
DO 4
DO 1
S11
S13
PI 1
DO 2
SPARE
DO 3
DO 4
PI
STAT
N/A
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
M/A
MFC/P
(230)
100
S1
101
102
S2
APID
S2
103
104
S1
S3
105
DI 1
106
N/A
S9
S10
170
SLC I/O
PA
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
(31)
TSTQ
S4
S4
S5
107
SP
CO
PV
BI
TR
BD
R
FF
N/A
111
S8
S9
112
S10
109
110
S3
S4
S5
S18
S19
TF
S6
S7
108
(156)
N/A
II
DI
S20
S21
S22
S24
S25
PV
SP
SP
O
TR
C/R
TS
C
C-F
AX
352
354
353
M/A SLC
355
S1
CX
HAA
LAA
S26
S27
S28
LDA
S29
S30
TRS2
HDA
AO
TRPV
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
S3
S4
GPA 1
SL1
GPA 2
SL2
S5
S6
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
S7
S8
AUX 1
SW3
AUX 2
SW4
S9
S10
ALM 1
A/M 1
ALM 2
A/M 2
S11
S12
ASCII
A/M 3
OP 1
A/M 4
S13
S14
OP 2
N/A
OP 3
N/A
S2
LX
114
(182)
56
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
350
C/R
113
115
116
A
A
(80)
351
T
57
S15
CONTROL OUTPUT 1
S1
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1022
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1021
ASCII
STDESC
OP 4
(231)
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
(113)
1020
H//L
S1
H
L
(12)
240
241
H//L
S1
H
L
(12)
250
251
TP80459B
Figure A-11. Ratio Control with Two Temperature Inputs
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A - 11
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
Fixed Block Locations
Figure A-12 illustrates the fixed block locations of function codes after
reinitialization with the configure menu. Any block address between
30 and 1019 can be configured except those occupied by these fixed
block function codes.
0
EXEC
MFC/P
0
AI/DEF
CBC
(81)
SU
10
MEM
11
PT
1
REV
1
N/A
12
13
S9
S10
(82)
PT
15
ET
16
2
UF
DR
-100.0
CT
3
17
18
19
S1
H
4
M
S
VT
0.0
Y
5
MO
D
DW
6
100.0
7
-9E18
8
+9E18
9
N/A
S1
LAST
BLOCK
RCJ
ST
SLC I/O
(182)
50
51
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
(182)
52
53
S9
S10
PA
RCJ
S1
S2
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
S3
S4
AI 3
AI 3
AI 4
AI 4
S5
S6
AO 1
AO 1
AO 2
AO 2
S7
S8
DO 1
DI 1
DO 2
DI 2
S9
S10
DO 3
S11
S13
PI 1
(182)
mV
54
ST
55
DO 4
SPARE
(90)
20
21
22
PA
RCJ
101
102
103
104
105
108
DO 1
109
DI 3
DO 2
DO 3
PI
STAT
N/A
M/A 1
ALM
S2
S3
M/A 2
ACK
GPA 1
SL1
110
111
S4
S5
GPA 2
SL2
GPA 3
SW1
112
113
S6
S7
GPA 4
SW2
AUX 1
SW3
114
115
S8
S9
AUX 2
SW4
ALM 1
A/M 1
116
S10
S11
ALM 2
A/M 2
ASCII
A/M 3
S12
S13
OP 1
A/M 4
OP 2
N/A
S14
S15
OP 3
N/A
(182)
mV
56
ST
57
23
24
25
26
S1
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1022
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1021
M/A SLC
S1
DO 4
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
(230)
100
106
107
N/A
27
N/A
28
1.0
mV
AI/DEF
CBC
EXEXEC
MFC/P
-1.0
PA
AI/DEF
CBC
14
SEGCRM
0.0
S9
S10
ASCII
STDESC
OP 4
(231)
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
(113)
1020
29
(89)
TP80461B
Figure A-12. Fixed Block Locations of Function Codes After Initialization
Figure A-13 illustrates the fixed block locations of the controller I/O
and station function codes (function codes 230 and 231). These
blocks are required for every configuration. Function code 230 occupies blocks 100 through 116; function code 231 occupies blocks 900
through 913. For ease of use, the analog input definition (function
code 182), representing the four analog inputs, is also downloaded to
blocks 50 through 57. These may be moved to any other free block
location using an external programming device. Loop specific information is stored in the ASCII string description function code (function
code 113). These are located at blocks 1020 through 1022. These
function codes are inserted when the unit is reinitialized from the configure menu.
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A - 12
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
RCJ
mV
ST
SLC I/O
(182)
50
AI 1
AI 1
AI 2
AI 2
S3
S4
AI 3
AI 3
AI 4
AI 4
S5
S6
AO 1
AO 1
(182)
52
AO 2
AO 2
S7
S8
DO 1
DI 1
53
DO 2
DI 2
S9
S10
DO 3
DI 3
DO 4
DO 1
S11
S13
PI 1
DO 2
SPARE
DO 3
51
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
S1
(182)
54
55
S2
DO 4
PI
STAT
N/A
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
N/A
(230)
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
M/A SLC
107
S1
108
S2
109
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
S3
S4
GPA 1
SL1
GPA 2
SL2
S5
S6
GPA 3
SW1
GPA 4
SW2
S7
S8
AUX 1
SW3
114
AUX 2
SW4
115
S9
ALM 1
A/M 1
116
S10
S11
ALM 2
A/M 2
ASCII
A/M 3
OP 1
A/M 4
OP 2
N/A
OP 3
N/A
110
USER CONFIGURATION SPACE
111
112
113
(182)
56
S12
S13
S14
57
S15
S1
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1022
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1021
ASCII
STDESC
OP 4
(231)
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
(113)
1020
TP80462B
Figure A-13. Fixed Block Locations for Function Codes 113, 230 and 231
Figure A-14 represents the fixed block locations of the executive function codes and the last block location. These blocks are required for
every configuration, and are inserted after reinitialization from the
configure menu.
Figures A-13 and A-14 are good starting points for custom configurations. Use Figure A-15 as a template for custom configurations. Start
with a reinitialized configuration space, select a factory configuration
or customize one of the factory configurations to suit specific requirements.
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A - 13
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
0
EXEC
MFC/P
0
SU
MEM
PT
1
REV
1
N/A
SEGCRM
0.0
PT
2
ET
UF
(81)
10
11
12
13
14
(82)
15
16
17
18
CT
19
DR
-100.0
3
EXEXEC
MFC/P
-1.0
S1
H
4
M
S
VT
0.0
Y
5
MO
D
DW
N/A
1.0
N/A
6
S1
100.0
7
-9E18
8
+9E18
9
LAST
BLOCK
(90)
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
(89)
1023
TP80463B
Figure A-14. Fixed Block Locations for
Function Codes 81, 82, 89 and 90
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A - 14
WBPEEUI130200B0
USER CONFIGURATION SPACE
M/A
MFC/P
S1
S2
S3
APID
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
51
(182)
52
53
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S10
PA
mV
RCJ
ST
SP
S3
S4
TR
S5
S6
R
S7
S8
N/A
AI 1
II
AI 3
S9
S10
SLC I/O
(182)
50
AI/DEF
CBC
S9
S2
S1
S1
55
(230)
100
AI 2
101
S2
S3
AI 2
S4
S5
AI 4
AI 4
AO 1
AO 1
S6
S7
AO 2
AO 2
DO 1
DI 1
S8
S9
DO 2
DI 2
DO 3
DI 3
S10
S11
DO 4
DO 1
PI 1
DO 2
S13
(182)
54
AI 1
AI 3
S9
S10
PA
RCJ
mV
DO 4
PI
STAT
ST
N/A
(182)
56
57
S4
S5
PV
S18
S19
TF
S20
S21
FF
S22
S24
S25
N/A
S26
DI
104
105
106
107
SP
SP
O
115
116
C/R
C
TS
C-F
AX
(80)
N+1
N
N+2
N+4
N+3
N+5
C/R
LX
CX
HAA
LAA
HDA
S27
S28
LDA
S29
S30
TRS2
AO
TRPV
T
M/A
MFC/P
S1
S2
112
113
114
A
A
TR
108
109
110
SPARE DO 3
111
N/A
AI/DEF
CBC
102
103
(156)
N
BI
N+1
BD
N+2
CO
PV
SP
CO
S1
S3
PV
BI
TR
BD
S4
S5
TF
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
SP
SP
O
(156)
S3
S4
N
N+1
N+2
S5
S18
TS
S19
S20
AX
APID
S2
PV
R
FF
N/A
N/A
II
DI
C
C-F
N
N+2
N+4
N+3
M/A SLC
N+5
S1
(231)
900
901
SL1
902
M/A 1
ALM
M/A 2
ACK
S21
S22
LX
S3
S4
GPA 1
S24
S25
HAA
S5
S6
GPA 3
SW1
S26
S27
GPA 4
SW2
HDA
S7
S8
AUX 1
SW3
LDA
AUX 2
SW4
AO
S9
ALM 1
A/M 1
TRS2
S10
S11
ALM 2
A/M 2
ASCII
A/M 3
S12
S13
OP 1
A/M 4
OP 2
N/A
S14
S15
OP 3
N/A
CX
LAA
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
A - 15
TRPV
(113) S1
1022
T
ASCII
STDESC
(113) S1
1021
ASCII
STDESC
GPA 2
OP 4
SL2
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
(113)
1020
TP80464A
Figure A-15. User Configuration Space
CONFIGURATION DRAWINGS
S2
S29
S30
ASCII
STDESC
C/R
C/R
S28
S1
A
A
TR
(80)
N+1
APPENDIX B - TYPE SLC SETUP WORKSHEETS
INTRODUCTION
This appendix contains the Type SLC setup worksheets. Remove and
reproduce these worksheets as necessary.
INTRODUCTION
B-1
Worksheet
SLC
SLC SETUP WORKSHEET
Loop Tag Name:
________________________
(14 characters max.)
Process Variable Engineering Units (EU):
________________________
(5 characters max.)
Set Point Engineering Units (EU):
________________________
(5 characters max.)
Decimal Places:
_ 0
_ 1
_ 2
_ 3
Control Output Hi Tag:
_ 100/0
_ 0/100
_ OPN/CLS
_ CLS/OPN
Control Output Lo Tag:
_ 100/0
_ 0/100
_ OPN/CLS
_ CLS/OPN
Power Up Mode:
_ MAN
_ AUT
_ LAS
_ CAS
Power Up AO1:
_ High
_ Low
Fail AO1:
_ High
_ Low
Audible Alarm:
_ On
_ Off
Bypass Action:
_ Dir
_ Rev
Process Display Type:
_ 2 Bar
_ 3 Vertical Bar
_ 2 Vertical Bar
(Horizontal CO)
Module Bus Address:
__________
Digital Output Faceplate Lockout:
DO1:
DO2:
DO3:
DO4:
_
_
_
_
Master
Technician
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_ 4
_ RAT
_ 2 Vertical Bar
(Reverse)
(select 0 - 31)
Lock
Lock
Lock
Lock
_
_
_
_
Unlock
Unlock
Unlock
Unlock
Security Levels and Passwords:
Environment:
Bypass
Tune
D.O. Control
Aux. Switch
Setup
Configure
Password (3 characters max.)
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
Worksheet
SLC
Optional Inputs (Temperature/Frequency)
Optional Analog Input List
Thermocouple
Type SL22:
RTD
Millivolt
S
2-wire 100 Ω Lab
R
2-wire 100 Ω Ind
E
2-wire 100 Ω Eur
J
2-wire 100 Ω Pure Ni Chem
K
3-wire 100 Ω Lab
T
3-wire 100 Ω Ind
N
3-wire 100 Ω Eur
-20 to +80 mV
Ch E
3-wire 100 Ω Pure Ni Chem
Ch S
—
DI3 - Frequency Input
_ No
_ Yes ___________________
AI3 - Temperature Input
_ No
_ Yes ___________________
_ No
_ Yes ___________________
(select from Optional Analog Input List)
AI4 - Temperature Inputs
(select from Optional Analog Input List)
Faceplate Switch:
Loop 1
Loop 2
Auxiliary Switch Labels:
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
Switch 4
_ No
_ No
_ Yes
_ Yes
On Tag _________
Off Tag _________
(4 characters max.)
On Tag _________
Off Tag _________
(4 characters max.)
(4 characters max.)
(4 characters max.)
0 State
1 State
Tag _________
Tag _________
(6 characters max.)
0 State
1 State
Tag _________
Tag _________
(6 characters max.)
0 State
1 State
Tag _________
Tag _________
(6 characters max.)
0 State
1 State
Tag _________
Tag _________
(6 characters max.)
_ No
_ Yes
Ambient Temperature at Wiring Terminals Entered?
(6 characters max.)
(6 characters max.)
(6 characters max.)
(6 characters max.)
_____ °C
(only required after replacement of main board, termination unit or NVRAM, or firmware change)
Document Firmware Revision Level:
Main Board: __________
(select MONITOR from the main menu, then select STATUS for correct revision level)
Op Int Board: __________
APPENDIX C - TYPE SLC CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS
INTRODUCTION
This appendix contains the Type SLC configuration worksheets.
Remove and reproduce them as necessary.
INTRODUCTION
C-1
Worksheet
SLC
STANDARD CONFIGURATION
Configuration Type:
_ Single PID
_ Cascade
_ Single PID EX
_ Ratio
Engineering Units:
_________
_________
Square Root:
_ Yes
PID Constants:
_____
Conv. Factor
_____
KP
_____
Hi CO Limit%
_____
Lo CO Limit%
_ Dual PID
_ Dual PID EX
Analog Input Zero (-100,000.00 to +100,000.00) _______ EU
Analog Input Span (-100,000.00 to +100,000.00) _______ EU
_ No
_____
KI
_____
(0.000 to 100.00)
Control Output:
(-5.0% to 105.0%)
Action:
_ Direct
_ Reverse
Process Variable Zero:
_________
(-100,000.00 to +100,000.00)
Set Point Zero:
_________
(-100,000.00 to +100,000.00)
PV SP Span:
_________
(-100,000.00 to +100,000.00)
PV Alarm Values:
_________
High
_________
Low
(-100,000.00 to +100,000.00)
Go to manual control upon bad quality of analog loop I/O?
_ Yes
_ No
KD
Worksheet
SLC
CUSTOM CONFIGURATION
Analog Inputs/Outputs
Unit Tag:
___________________________
Module Bus Address:
___________________________
AI1 (FC 182, BLK 50):
_ 4-20 mA
_ 1-5 VDC
_____
Zero
_____
Span
AI2 (FC 182, BLK 52):
_ 4-20 mA
_ 1-5 VDC
_____
Zero
_____
Span
AI3 (FC 182, BLK 54):
_ 4-20 mA
_ 1-5 VDC
_____
Zero
_____
Span
_ mV (-20 to +80)
_ Thermocouple
_ RTD
Type _________
Type _________
_ 4-20 mA
_ 1-5 VDC
_____
_ mV (-20 to +80)
_ Thermocouple
_ RTD
Type _________
Type _________
(With optional input board)
AI4 (FC 182, BLK 56):
(With optional input board)
Zero
Spec 1
Undefined
0
Input Type
Spec 1
RTDs :
1
Thermocouples:
U.S. Lab Std 100 Ω Platinum
[X]20
S
001
U. S. Ind Std 100 Ω Platinum
[X]21
R
002
EUR Std 100 Ω Platinum
[X]22
E
003
120 Ω Chemically Pure Nickel
[X]23
J
004
K
005
T
006
Ch E
007
Ch S
008
N
009
Millivolts:
-20 to +80
064
NOTE:
1. [X] = 0 for 2-wire RTD, [X] = 1 for 3-wire RTD.
AO1 (switch S1-6 on TU):
_ 4-20 mA
_ 1-5 VDC
(refer to Table 0-1)
AO2 (switch S1-5 on TU):
_ 4-20 mA
_ 1-5 VDC
(refer to Table 0-1)
Analog Input List)
_____
Optional Analog Input List (Function Code 182, Spec 1)
Input Type
(refer to Optional
Span
(refer to Optional
Analog Input List)
Worksheet
SLC
Digital Inputs/Outputs
Unit Tag:
___________________________
Module Bus Address:
___________________________
DI1 (FC 230, BLK 106):
_ Isolated
_ Non-Isolated
DI2 (FC 230, BLK 107):
_ Isolated
_ Non-Isolated
DI3 (FC 230, BLK 108):
_ Isolated
_ Non-Isolated
DO1 (FC 230, BLK 109):
____________
Input Block Address (S7)
DO2 (FC 230, BLK 110):
____________
Input Block Address (S8)
DO3 (FC 230, BLK 111):
____________
Input Block Address (S9)
DO4 (FC 230, BLK 112):
____________
Input Block Address (S10)
_ Pulse Input Option Board
APPENDIX D - QUICK REFERENCE
INTRODUCTION
Figures D-1, D-2, D-3, D-4, D-5 and D-6 provide a quick reference of
switch and jumper settings, connector locations, and fuse types and
locations for the Type SLC controller.
D E FAU LT
H IG H LE V EL
IN P U T
1 2 3 4 5
J5
A I3
TE M PE R ATU R E
IN P U T
1 2 3 4 5
J5
A I3
J4
A I3
J4
A I3
J6
A I4
J6
A I4
J3
A I4
J3
A I4
O N LY W ITH
O P TIO N A L
IN P U T B O AR D
TE R M IN ATIO N
B O AR D
AC C E SS
3
2
1
J7
FR O N T
AC C E SS
3
2
1
J7
S ER IA L P O RT
JUMPER
R IB BO N C A BLE
TO O P E R ATO R
IN TE R FAC E B O AR D
P4
J7
P8
J5
J4
J6
J3
P7
U 24
O P TIO N A L IN P U T
B O AR D J U M P ER S
FU S E F1
2.5 A, 2 50 V
(IN T ER N A L D C
P OW E R IN TE R RU P T)
S ER IA L IN TE R FAC E
B O AR D C O N N E C TO R S
U 54
U 12
O P TIO N A L IN P U T
B O AR D C O N N E C TO R
J1
J2
D E FAU LT
S TA N DAR D
IN P U T
1 2 3
J1
D I3
J2
D I3
P6
D I3/P 1 IN P U T
FR E Q U E N C Y
IN P U T
1 2 3
J1
D I3
J2
D I3
O N LY W ITH
O P TIO N A L
IN P U T B O AR D
T 02 1 72 A
Figure D-1. Main Board
R IB BO N C A BLE
TO M A IN B O AR D
P4
P2
U 18
U6
P7
P6
P5
T 02 17 7 A
Figure D-2. Operator Interface Board
INTRODUCTION
D-1
QUICK REFERENCE
C O N N EC T JU M P ER W 1 10
TO E3 F O R 1 2 0 VAC O R
22 0 /240 VAC. C O N N E C T
JU M P E R W 1 1 0 TO E4 F O R
24 VD C .
E4
W 110
E3
FU S E F 10 2
2 A , 2 5 0 V, S L O B LO W
(D C O U TP U T )
F1 02
W 101
W 106
W 1 06
S TA PL E JU M P E R
F1 01
FU S E F 10 1
3 A, 250 V
(AC LIN E )
W 101 S TA P LE JU M PE R
(C U T F O R 2 20 /24 0 VAC )
T 02 1 74 A
Figure D-3. Power Supply Board
TB1
C LB 01
C O N N E C TO R
20
2
19
18
3
4
SE R IA L
C O M M U N IC ATIO N S
TB2
1
17
P3
5
16
6
15
7
14
S1
9
12
10
11
11
10
12
P O W ER
S W IT C H
9
P5
13
8
14
7
15
6
16
S1
ON
I
I
I
I
V
V
S1
OFF
V
V
V
V
I
I
D I1
D I2
D I3
NON
NON
NON
IS O L
IS O L
IS O L
4
18
3
19
2
1
20
2
3
TB 4
4
1
2
3
4
TB 3
Figure D-4. Termination Board
INTRODUCTION
D-2
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
SW 3
17
1
A I1
A I2
A I3
A I4
AO 1
AO 2
13
8
T 02 1 73 A
QUICK REFERENCE
THE RM OC O U PL E IN PU T
1
2
A I3
A I4
PI
J3
J1
J5
J4
J2
J6
RT D IN PU T
3
1
2
0 -1 5 V P U L S E
1
2 3
J5
Fm ax = 4 K HZ
1
2 3
J6
0 -5 V P U L S E
1
2 3
J5
F m a x = 5 0 KH Z
1
2 3
J6
RT D IN PU T
THER M OC O U PL E IN PU T
3
1
2
3
1
J3
J3
J1
J1
J4
J4
J2
J2
2
3
T 02 1 75 A
Figure D-5. Options Board
J5
1
3
J5
4
2
1
3
J5
4
2
1
3
J5
4
2
1
3
4
2
5
6
5
6
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
11 9 1 0 1 2
D T E, N O
H A N D SH A KIN G
1 1 9 1 0 12
D T E,
HA N D SH A KIN G
11 9 1 0 12
DCE, NO
H A N DSH A KIN G
1 1 9 1 0 12
DCE,
H A N D SH A KIN G
J5
J4
J1
J2
J3
1
2
3
J4
J1
J2
J3
T 02 1 76 A
Figure D-6. Serial Interface Board
INTRODUCTION
D-3
APPENDIX E - SCREEN FLOWCHART
INTRODUCTION
Figure E-1 is a summary flowchart of the menus available for the
Type SLC controller.
INTRODUCTION
E-1
SCREEN FLOWCHART
PR OCESS
D IS P LAY
2
M A IN M E N U
S P LIT /FU L L
SCREEN
SEL
M O N ITO R M E N U
M O N ITO R
A N A LO G
IN P U T S
M O N ITO R
A N A LO G
OUTPUTS
M O N ITO R
D IG ITA L I/O
OU TPUTS
M O N ITO R
B LO C K
SEL
A LA R M
S U M M A RY
B Y PA S S
TUNE
D.O . C T R L
AU X S W IT C H
SEL
B Y PA S S LO C K
O N /O F F
SEL
T U N E PID
PA R A M E TE R S
SEL
D.O . AU TO /M A N
O N /O F F
SEL
AU X S W IT C H
O N /O F F
T U N E PV
A LA R M LIM IT S
SEL
SETUP
1
SEL
C O N F IG U R E
FAC TO RY
C O N F IG U R ATIO N
S E LE C T IO N M E N U
IN ITIA L IZ E
C O N F IG U R ATIO N
A D D /M O D IF Y
SEL
F U N C T IO N KE YS
N EXT
D IS P LAY
MENU
SUB MENU
S IN G L E L O O P
E X T ER N AL S P
S O F T M E N U W IT H
M ANY SUBM EN US
D UA L LO O P
M E N U C O N TA IN S 1
O R M O R E S U B M EN U S
D UA L LO O P
E X T ER N AL S P
D E TA ILS W IT H IN
SUBMENU
R AT IO
C O N F IG U R ATIO N
R IG H T FU N C TIO N (S O F T ) K E Y
SEL
A /M
SEL
S IN G L E L O O P
K EY TO S L C 0 1 S C R EE N
V IRT UA L
MENU
P R E V IO U S P R O C E S S
D IS P LAY
D IS P LAY
S TATU S
L EF T FU N C TIO N (S O F T ) K E Y
PROCESS
D IS P LAY
SEL
CASCADE
C O N F IG U R ATIO N
M ID D L E FU N C T IO N (S O F T ) K E Y
S E LE C T
LOOP
C O N F IG U R ATIO N
MENU
LOOP 1
C O N F IG U R ATIO N
C O N F IG U R E
A N A LO G
IN P U T S
C O N F IG U R E P ID
C O N S TA N T S
C O N F IG U R E
CONTR OL
O UTPU T
C O N F IG U R E
D IS P LAY S C A LE
(P V + S P )
C O N F IG U R E
Q UA L ITY
CHECK
LOOP 2
C O N F IG U R ATIO N
C O N F IG U R E
A N A LO G
IN P U T S
C O N F IG U R E P ID
C O N S TA N T S
C O N F IG U R E
CONTR OL
O UTPU T
C O N F IG U R E
D IS P LAY S C A LE
(P V + S P )
C O N F IG U R E
Q UA L ITY
CHECK
S AV E
C O N F IG U R ATIO N
Q U IT
C O N F IG U R ATIO N
T 02 2 49 A
Figure E-1. Screen Flowchart (Page 1 of 2)
INTRODUCTION
E-2
SCREEN FLOWCHART
2
SETUP
MENU
1
SEL
LOOP 1
SET LOOP
L AB E L S
SET LOOP
O P T IO N S
SET LOOP
D IS P LAY TY P E
LOOP 2
SET LOOP
L AB E L S
SET LOOP
O P T IO N S
SET LOOP
D IS P LAY TY P E
M O D U LE A D D R E S S
SET
ADDRESS
D.O . L O C K O U T
S E C U R ITY
SET
PA S S W O R D
SET
S E C U R IT Y
LEVEL
D IAG N O S T IC S
O P T IO N S
O P T IO N
SUBMENU
B R IG H T N E S S
O P T IO N B O A R D
SETUP
F P S W LO O P 1
SET
B R IG H T N E S S
L EV E L
F P S W LO O P 2
AU X SW IT C H
LABEL S
A M B IE N T T E M P
T R E N D LO O P 1
T R E N D LO O P 2
S E R IA L P O RT
T 02 25 0 A
Figure E-1. Screen Flowchart (Page 2 of 2)
INTRODUCTION
E-3
APPENDIX F - RETROFIT INSTRUCTIONS FOR
TYPE CLC CONTROLLER
INTRODUCTION
NOTE: Although this retrofit is possible, ABB reserves the right to
waive any guarantees of functionality. Installation environment and
existing condition of the case may affect noise and accuracy of the
instrument.
When retrofitting the Type CLC controller using Type SLC controller
boards and faceplate assembly, the following functions are not available and some performance specifications may be affected.
•
Power supply auctioneering between 120 VAC and 24 VDC cannot be done.
•
Optional temperature inputs will not be functional.
•
NDCS03 and IISAC01 second stations will not be functional.
•
•
•
•
•
Current/voltage switches for analog inputs and analog outputs, as
well as the isolation switches for the digital inputs, are on the
Type CLC termination unit board locations called out in the Type
CLC Loop Command Controller instruction (Table 1-2).
No surge protection will be available for the analog inputs and
digital inputs and outputs.
Not all Type CLC termination boards include a power switch.
The module bus address and other important settings of the Type
SLC controller are not switch selectable. They must be set
through the faceplate setup menu.
Analog input/output accuracy will be ±0.25%.
Retrofit Instructions
Parts required to complete this retrofit include:
•
•
Type SLC controller.
Adapter kit part number 258568_1.
1. Remove power from the Type CLC controller.
2. Open the legend access door on the Type CLC controller faceplate. Loosen the captive locking screw until the faceplate and operator interface board assembly can be pulled forward.
INTRODUCTION
F-1
RETROFIT INSTRUCTIONS FOR TYPE CLC CONTROLLER
3. Disconnect the ribbon connector from the main board to the interface board. Remove the faceplate/operator interface assembly from
the Type CLC controller housing.
4. Using the handle (pull tab), remove the main board from the
housing.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the power supply board if it is
operating correctly. The power supply board in the Type SLC controller will then become a spare board.
5. On the Type SLC controller, pull down on the small access door
below the display area on the controller faceplate. Loosen the captive
locking screw until the faceplate and operator interface board assembly can be pulled forward. Remove the assembly from the controller
housing.
6. Loosen screw and remove the card retainer. Use the handle (pull
tab) and remove the main board from the Type SLC controller housing (Fig. 8-2).
7. If the power supply board is going to be installed in the Type CLC
controller, remove it from the Type SLC controller now.
Assembling the Retrofit Unit
There are several items to be aware of while completing this retrofit
procedure.
1. The housing for the Type CLC controller is approximately 25.4
millimeters (1 inch) longer than the housing for the Type SLC controller. When seating the new boards, make certain that good contact is
made with the mating connectors. These boards will sit further back
into the housing.
2. The Type CLC controller faceplate is held in position with a locking screw at the top of the faceplate beneath the legend/access door.
The locking screw that secures the faceplate for the Type SLC controller is located under a small access door below the faceplate display. To accommodate this locking screw location change between
the two units, an adapter kit (part number 258568_1) provides all the
hardware necessary to complete the change and assembly instructions. Mount this hardware on the Type CLC controller housing now.
3. The configuration of the Type CLC controller will be lost. After retrofit, the controller will require setup and configuration procedures.
For simple PID functions and custom configurations, refer to
Section 4. Because of function code differences between the Types
CLC and SLC controllers, exact conversions of the present Type CLC
configuration would be very difficult. Contact ABB for additional information.
INTRODUCTION
F-2
RETROFIT INSTRUCTIONS FOR TYPE CLC CONTROLLER
To assemble the Type SLC controller boards into the Type CLC housing:
1. If installing a new power supply board, insert it now. Make certain
the card edge is seated in the termination board connector.
2. Install the main board partially into the Type CLC housing. While
installing the faceplate/operator interface board, connect the ribbon
connector to the main board. Push the board assemblies into the
housing. Make certain the main board is seated in the termination
board connector.
3. Tighten the captive locking screw to secure the faceplate assembly to the controller housing.
4. After all assembly is complete, the new controller will have to be
configured. Refer to Sections 3 and 4.
INTRODUCTION
F-3
Index
A
ABORT configuration ............................................... 4-11
AC safety ground........................................................ 2-9
AI SPAN ..................................................................... 4-7
AI ZERO ..................................................................... 4-6
AI3 TEMP ................................................................. 3-13
AI4 TEMP ................................................................. 3-14
Alarms
Acknowledging.................................................... 5-14
PV HI/LO............................................................. 4-10
Summary ............................................................ 5-13
User-installed...................................................... 3-22
Ambient temperature ................................................ 3-17
Analog inputs...................................2-19, 3-13, 3-15, 4-6
AI SPAN................................................................ 4-7
AI ZERO ............................................................... 4-6
SQRT.................................................................... 4-7
Analog outputs ........ 2-20, 3-6, 3-21, 4-11, 4-23, 6-5, 8-1
Current loop break ................................................ 6-5
Default settings ............................................ 3-6, 3-21
AUD ALARM .............................................................. 3-7
Audible alarm ............................................................. 3-7
AUX SWITCH ........................................................... 3-17
Auxiliary switch outputs ............................................ 5-19
B
Bar graph, control output ............................................ 4-8
BASIC station ...................................................... 5-5, 5-6
Changing modes................................................... 5-7
Block address ........................................................... 4-13
Boolean outputs ....................................................... 5-19
BRIGHTNESS .......................................................... 3-20
BYPASS ................................................................... 5-14
Manual and automatic ........................................ 5-14
Bypass operation........................................................ 3-7
C
CAL AI3 .................................................................... 3-15
CAL AI4 .................................................................... 3-15
Calibration
AI3 for temperature input .................................... 3-15
Temperature inputs............................................... 7-3
CASCADE .................................................................. 4-6
Operation ............................................................ 4-19
Station............................................................ 1-8, 5-7
Changing control output.................................. 5-7
Changing modes............................................. 5-8
CLB01 Loop Bypass Station ............................... 7-1, 8-1
CO HI/LO tag.............................................................. 3-5
Common mode voltage .............................................. 6-6
Communications capability
CIC01 module .......................................................1-5
Plant loop ..............................................................1-5
Serial interface ......................................................1-5
Conduit facilities..........................................................1-4
Configuration
Custom configuration ..........................................4-12
Block address ................................................4-13
Cascade operation ........................................4-19
Configuration lock..........................................4-20
Configuration utilization .................................4-17
Control functions ...........................................4-14
D.O. lock........................................................4-22
Data required.................................................4-17
Dual loop operation .......................................4-18
Fixed blocks ..................................................4-16
Function codes ..............................................4-14
Specification list.............................................4-16
Test quality blocks .........................................4-22
Trip blocks .....................................................4-22
Tune/modify lock ...........................................4-21
Type CTT Configuration
and Tuning Terminal......................................4-26
User-defined blocks.......................................4-16
Factory configuration.............................................4-3
AI SPAN ..........................................................4-7
AI ZERO ..........................................................4-6
CASCADE .......................................................4-5
Control loop selection ......................................4-5
CONV FACTOR ..............................................4-7
DIR/REV ..........................................................4-9
Drawings .........................................................4-3
DUAL PID ........................................................4-5
DUAL PID EX ..................................................4-5
HI/LO CO LIM%...............................................4-8
KP, KI and KD .................................................4-8
Manual control on bad quality........................4-10
Process variable ............................................4-10
Process variable alarms ..................................4-9
Process variable values...................................4-9
RATIO .............................................................4-5
Save or abort .................................................4-11
Set point ..........................................................4-9
SINGLE PID ....................................................4-5
SQRT ..............................................................4-7
Pushbutton functions.............................................4-1
Screen conventions...............................................4-1
Security levels .......................................................4-3
Worksheet ............................................................ C-1
Configuration lock .....................................................4-20
CONFIGURE mode ..................................................5-21
Connector, Type CTT .................................................1-5
Index - 1
Index (continued)
Control loop selection..................................................4-5
Control output .............................................................5-7
Bar graph...............................................................4-8
DIR/REV ..........................................................4-9
LO CO LIM % ..................................................4-8
CONV FACTOR ..........................................................4-7
D
D.O. CONTROL ........................................................5-18
D.O. LOCKOUT .................................................3-9, 3-22
DC system common ground......................................2-10
Decimal places............................................................3-5
Default settings .........................................................3-21
DI3 FREQ..................................................................3-13
Diagnostics..................................................................6-1
Digital inputs.....................................................2-21, 3-13
Digital outputs ................................. 3-9, 3-22, 4-22, 5-18
DIR/REV......................................................................4-9
Direct operation...........................................................4-9
Display brightness.....................................................3-20
DUAL PID....................................................................4-6
DUAL PID EX..............................................................4-6
AC safety ground .................................................. 2-9
DC system common ........................................... 2-10
Electrode............................................................. 2-11
Multiple controllers.............................................. 2-10
Single point .................................................. 2-10, 6-6
H
Hazardous locations ................................................... 2-3
HI/LO CO LIM%.......................................................... 4-8
I
Input boards, optional ............................................... 3-12
Installation
Conduit requirements ........................................... 2-4
Hazardous locations ............................................. 2-3
Location ................................................................ 2-3
Mounting ............................................................... 2-4
Mounting procedures ............................................ 2-4
RFI ........................................................................ 2-3
Temperature constraints ....................................... 2-4
Wiring.................................................................... 2-4
E
J
Error messages....................................................6-1, 6-5
ERROR mode ...........................................................5-22
EXECUTE mode .......................................................5-21
Jumper settings
Main board.......................................................... 2-21
Option board ....................................................... 2-22
Serial interface board.......................................... 2-24
Jumper settings, summary .........................................D-1
Jumpers
W101 .................................................................... 2-8
W106 .................................................................. 2-10
W110 .................................................................... 2-7
F
Faceplate locking screw..............................................1-5
Faceplate switch, user-defined .................................3-16
Factory configuration
Drawings ...............................................................4-3
Entering data .........................................................4-3
FAIL AO #1 .................................................................3-6
Fatal error....................................................................1-8
Fixed blocks ..............................................................4-16
FP SW LOOP 1.........................................................3-16
Frequency input ........................................................3-13
Board...................................................................3-12
Function blocks ..................................................1-8, 4-16
Function codes...................................................1-8, 4-14
Fuses
Main board ............................................................8-4
Power supply board...............................................8-5
G
Glossary of terms ........................................................1-8
Grounding
Index - 2
K
KD............................................................................... 4-8
KI ................................................................................ 4-8
KP............................................................................... 4-8
L
Locking screw ............................................................. 1-5
Loop............................................................................ 1-8
Changing .............................................................. 5-5
Options ................................................................. 3-5
Analog output default ...................................... 3-6
Analog output power up level.......................... 3-6
Audible alarm .................................................. 3-6
Bypass operation ............................................ 3-7
Process display type ....................................... 3-7
Index (continued)
Station power up ............................................. 3-5
Tag name.............................................................. 3-4
M
Main board jumper settings ...................................... 2-21
Main menu................................................................ 5-10
Maintenance ............................................................... 7-1
Calibrating temperature inputs.............................. 7-3
Edge connectors................................................... 7-4
Faceplate .............................................................. 7-2
Printed circuit boards ............................................ 7-3
Schedule............................................................... 7-2
MODBUS ADDR......................................................... 3-8
Modes of operation................................................... 5-21
Configure ............................................................ 5-21
Error.................................................................... 5-22
Execute............................................................... 5-21
Module bus ................................................................. 1-8
Address................................................................. 3-8
MONITOR function ................................................... 5-11
Mounting
Controller .............................................................. 2-4
Procedures ........................................................... 2-4
N
Nomenclature ............................................................. 1-9
O
Operating procedures................................................. 5-1
Auxiliary switch outputs ...................................... 5-19
Bypass ................................................................ 5-14
Change loop ......................................................... 5-5
Changing control output.......................... 5-6, 5-7, 5-9
Changing set point.................................. 5-5, 5-7, 5-9
Controller reset ................................................... 5-20
D.O. control......................................................... 5-18
Full or split screen................................................. 5-5
Main menu .......................................................... 5-10
Monitor................................................................ 5-11
Status display ..................................................... 5-12
TUNE function .................................................... 5-17
Operation
Bypass ................................................................ 5-14
Cascade.............................................................. 4-19
Direct or reverse ............................................ 3-7, 4-9
Dual loop............................................................. 4-18
Normal .................................................................. 5-2
Reverse acting final control element................... 4-26
Option board
Jumper settings .................................................. 2-22
Replacement .........................................................8-6
Options, setup
Ambient temperature...........................................3-17
Auxiliary switch labels .........................................3-17
Calibrate AI3/AI4 .................................................3-14
Serial interface ....................................................3-19
Temperature/frequency input board ....................3-12
AI3 TEMP ......................................................3-13
AI4 TEMP ......................................................3-14
DI3 FREQ ......................................................3-12
User-defined faceplate switch .............................3-16
Output bar graph labels ..............................................3-5
Overrange error ..........................................................6-6
P
Peer-to-peer communications.....................................1-8
Performance specifications.........................................1-8
PID constants............................................................5-15
CONV FACTOR ....................................................4-7
KD .........................................................................4-8
KI...........................................................................4-8
KP .........................................................................4-8
PID screen ..................................................................4-7
Preventive maintenance .............................................7-1
Process control integrity..............................................6-1
Process display...........................................................3-7
Full or split screen .................................................5-3
Process loop setup .....................................................3-4
Decimal places ......................................................3-4
Loop tag name ......................................................3-4
Output bar graph labels.........................................3-5
PV EU ...................................................................3-4
SP EU ...................................................................3-4
Product overview
Functional..............................................................1-2
Physical.................................................................1-4
Pushbutton functions ...........................................3-1, 4-1
PV EU .........................................................................3-4
PV HI/LO ALM ..........................................................4-10
PV SP SPAN...............................................................4-9
PV ZERO ....................................................................4-9
PWR UP AO #1 ..........................................................3-6
PWR UP AO #2 ..........................................................3-6
PWR UP MODE..........................................................3-6
Q
Quality, bad (see signal quality)................................4-10
Index - 3
Index (continued)
R
RATIO .........................................................................4-6
RATIO station............................................. 1-8, 4-18, 5-8
Changing modes .................................................5-10
Reference documents .................................................1-8
Reference error ...........................................................6-6
Repair/replacement
Faceplate/operator interface assembly .................8-2
Fuses, F101, F102, F1 ..........................................8-4
Main board ............................................................8-5
Option board..........................................................8-6
Power supply board...............................................8-3
Serial interface board ............................................8-6
Termination board .................................................8-6
RESET button ....................................................1-5, 5-20
Reverse operation.......................................................4-9
S
Safety
Ground ..................................................................2-9
Related inputs .....................................................4-22
SAVE configuration ...................................................4-11
Screen
Conventions ...................................................3-1, 4-1
Flowchart.............................................................. E-1
Security
Configuration lock................................................4-20
Levels ...........................................................3-10, 4-3
Tune/modify lock .................................................4-21
Serial interface .....................................................1-4, 1-5
Setup ...................................................................3-19
Serial interface adapter .............................................2-23
Serial interface board
Jumper settings ...................................................2-24
Replacement .........................................................8-6
Set point ......................................................................5-5
Setup
AI3 temperature input..........................................3-13
Ambient temperature...........................................3-17
Analog output default ............................................3-6
AO power up level .................................................3-6
Audible alarm ........................................................3-7
Bypass operation...................................................3-7
Calibrating AI3.....................................................3-15
Calibrating AI4.....................................................3-15
Decimal places ......................................................3-5
DI3 frequency input .............................................3-13
Diagnostics (see troubleshooting) .......................3-12
Digital outputs lockout ...........................................3-9
Display brightness ...............................................3-20
Faceplate switch..................................................3-16
Index - 4
Module bus address ............................................. 3-8
Optional input boards.......................................... 3-12
Output bar graphs................................................. 3-5
Power up mode..................................................... 3-6
Procedure ............................................................. 3-3
Process display type ............................................. 3-7
PV engineering units............................................. 3-4
Security levels..................................................... 3-10
Serial interface.................................................... 3-19
Set point engineering units ................................... 3-4
Tag name.............................................................. 3-4
Worksheet.............................................................B-1
Shipping damage........................................................ 2-1
Signal quality ............................................................ 4-10
Bad or good ........................................................ 4-22
Broken analog output current loop...................... 4-23
SINGLE PID ............................................................... 4-6
SINGLE PID EX.......................................................... 4-6
Single point
Grounding ........................................................... 2-10
Single controllers ................................................ 2-10
SP EU......................................................................... 3-4
SP ZERO .................................................................... 4-9
Special handling procedures ...................................... 2-1
Specifications ............................................................. 1-8
Environmental ..................................................... 1-12
SQRT.......................................................................... 4-7
Start-up procedures.................................................... 5-2
Station
Cascade................................................................ 1-8
Power up............................................................... 3-6
Ratio ............................................................ 1-8, 4-18
Station functions
Basic ................................................................... 4-17
Cascade.............................................................. 4-17
Ratio ................................................................... 4-17
Status bytes....................................................... 5-12, 6-3
STATUS screen.......................................................... 6-3
Switch settings.......................................................... 2-19
Analog inputs ...................................................... 2-19
Analog outputs .................................................... 2-20
Digital inputs ....................................................... 2-21
Switch settings, summary...........................................D-1
T
Tag name ................................................................... 3-4
Temperature
Ambient............................................................... 3-17
Input............................................................. 3-13, 7-3
Board............................................................. 3-12
Calibrating AI3............................................... 3-15
Index (continued)
Termination board
Analog inputs ...........................2-19, 2-20, 2-21, 2-22
Switch settings.................................................... 2-19
Analog inputs ................................................ 2-19
Analog outputs .............................................. 2-20
Digital inputs ................................................. 2-21
Termination unit.......................................................... 1-8
Trend screen ................................................... 3-18, 5-17
Troubleshooting.......................................................... 6-1
TUNE function .......................................................... 5-15
PID constants ..................................................... 5-15
Process variable (PV) alarms ............................. 5-17
Tune/modify lock ...................................................... 4-21
U
W
Wild variable ...............................................................1-8
Wiring
AC power ..............................................................2-8
Analog input ........................................................2-12
Conduit ................................................................2-12
DC power ..............................................................2-6
Input/output .........................................................2-12
Installation .............................................................2-4
Internal volume......................................................2-6
Lugless connectors ...............................................2-4
Worksheets
Configuration........................................................ C-1
Setup.................................................................... B-1
Unpacking and inspection .......................................... 2-1
User-defined blocks.................................................. 4-16
Index - 5
PN25055
The Company’s policy is one of continuous product improvement and the
right is reserved to modify the information contained herein without notice.
© 2002 ABB Automation Inc.
ABB Inc.
Instrumentation Division
125 East County Line Road
Warminster, PA 18974 USA
Tel. 215-674-6000
FAX: 215-674-7183
ABB Instrumentation Ltd
Howard Road, St. Neots
Cambs. England, PE19 3EU
Tel. +44 (0) 1480-475-321
FAX: +44 (0) 1480-217-948
ABB Instrumentation S.p.A
Via Sempione 243
20016 Pero (Milano) Italy
Tel: +39 (02) 33928 1
Fax: +39 (02) 33928 240
Printed in USA
ABB Automation Products GmbH
Industriestr. 28
D-65760 Eschborn Germany
Tel: +49 (0) 6196 800 0
Fax: +49 (0) 6196 800 1849

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement